JP2018161389A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of fueling player's eagerness to play a game by enhancing the degree of attention to the game and the amusement of the game.SOLUTION: In the game machine, an MPU causes a speaker to output a temporarily selected music selectable by player's determination operation on a determination button for selecting a music, and when the determination operation onto the temporarily selected music is performed, the MPU causes the speaker to output the temporarily selected music as a selected music. In a case where the selected music is an already selected music which has ever been selected by the player (step S2801: No), the MPU causes the temporarily selected music which has been outputted from the speaker with the timing of the execution of the determination operation to be outputted continuously (step S4701, step S2811).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 77

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  In general, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a music selected by a player from a plurality of music may be output as an effect during a big hit game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-49375 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play by increasing attention to the game and interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The production execution means (51)
The music selection image (83) is at least a temporarily selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporary selection music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the voice output means (26) is caused to output the temporary selection music, and the temporary selection is performed when the determination operation is performed. The music output that has been performed is output from the voice output means (26) as the selected music,
When the predetermined condition that is set in advance is satisfied, the provisionally selected music that has been output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed is continuously output.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can raise the attention degree to a game and the interest of a game, and can improve a player's willingness to play can be provided.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of a gaming machine. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of a gaming machine. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of a gaming machine. The front view which shows an example of the game board of a gaming machine. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a gaming machine. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st pending | holding command setting process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game time control process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the fluctuation | variation start process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed with a game machine. A table showing a relationship between a detection pattern and an operation status. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection image display process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection image display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows the example of a change of the temporary selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the example of a change of the temporary selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the other example of the temporary music selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the music selection counter data table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the already selected music list table and non-selected music list table which are used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement | sequence order data table with respect to the some music used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial stage arrangement | sequence of a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the initial music selection image display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows the other example of the initial stage arrangement | sequence of a music selection image. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the initial temporary selection music determination process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the temporary selection music lottery table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the initial provisional selection music output process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the temporary selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of 5R probability variable music selection button effect determination processing performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection button production table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R probability variable selection button production lottery table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of 16R probability variable selection button effect determination processing performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 16R probability variable selection button production lottery table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game start stand-by process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting item selection process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting log | history selection process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting log | history screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music list display setting log | history screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect log | history screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the temporary selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the selection music output process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the temporary selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process performed with a game machine.

  Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for the understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. FIG. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a spinning-bowl gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, or other players such as a soccer ball gaming machine. The present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines.

  The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection / determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination unit 27. .

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). The operation button 20 is used to reflect the player's intention in the jackpot game effect in a game turn effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15) described later.

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key is provided as an operation means instead of the operation button 20. Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is also conceivable that a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided as operation means. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the effect in a game round effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15) described later.

  The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and the player presses the player in a later-described music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23), a game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15), and the like. A push button to accept. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by a player to temporarily select a desired item from options (items) displayed on a symbol display unit 341 described later in the music selection process and the game setting process. An upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214 are included. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 includes operation switches 211a to 211d (see FIG. 5) for switching an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine the operation state (with and without operation) of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

  On the other hand, the determination button 21B is operated by the player to determine the provisionally selected item. The determination button 21B includes an operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine the operation state (with and without operation) of the decision button 21B.

  Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21 </ b> A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21 </ b> B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation by the player of the touch key may be provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21 </ b> A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21 </ b> B, it may be considered that a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided as operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214).

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 (see FIG. 3) of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and stores the stored game balls in one row. It is used for guiding to the game ball launching mechanism 32 in an aligned state. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 (see FIG. 2) of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and include a game time effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15) and a jackpot game effect process (FIG. 23) and the like. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the illumination part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs a lamp | ramp effect by lighting modes, such as lighting or blinking. The speaker 26 is an example of the audio output means of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, various commands (control signals) for instructing the content of control are transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first operating port 314, a second operating port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, and an out port 318. A variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, and a main display unit 37 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeder 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. In addition, on the back side of the game board 31, game balls can be detected individually corresponding to the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Entrance sensors 313a, 314a, 315a and 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the player hits the right.

  The entrance sensors 313a to 317a are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, detection of a game ball by the ball sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The incoming sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensors that can individually detect incoming incoming game balls by other detection methods.

  Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the game ball can enter the second operation port 315 by opening the electric accessory 315 b, and the game ball can enter the second operation port 315 by closing the electric accessory 315 b. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable prize opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the variable prize opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening / closing door 316b is opened, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable prize opening 316, and when the opening / closing door 316b is closed, the game ball is restricted from entering the variable prize opening 316. The

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball to the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 is detected by the entrance sensor 314 a or the entrance sensor 315 a, the main control unit 331 determines whether or not to win a big hit. (Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “hit lottery”). And the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display part 37 according to a lottery result. In addition, the jackpot lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball to the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the winning sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and entering the variable winning opening 316. In this case, the number of prize balls is fifteen. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the state where the variable winning opening 316 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is determined a predetermined number of times (For example, 5 times and 16 times), a lot of prize balls are paid out, and a game value is given to the player.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big win lottery is executed. When the result of the determination of success / failure is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state), and 16R probability jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state includes a game including an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is performed five times until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls or more are won in the variable prize opening 316. State. The 16R probable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state including an open / close execution mode in which round games are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than the 5R jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot gaming state. The gaming state.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed at a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a symbol variation display and a game turn effect display according to the result of the big win lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the upper operation port 314 or the lower operation port 315 Various displays are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is disposed, for example, at the upper part or the lower part, or the left part or the right part of the symbol display part 341. The sub display unit may be movable between a position covering the symbol display unit 341 and a position not covering the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols having numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and that there are nine main symbol types “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, symbol variation display is executed in each gaming time so that the variation of all main symbols is stopped after a preset variation display time from the start of symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. The More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols vary along a preset variation direction (horizontal or vertical), and the variation of a plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R-probable jackpot”, “16R-probable jackpot”, or “5R normal jackpot”, the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are arranged on the active line is displayed and the jackpot Is specified. The jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the active line, but is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “16R probability variation jackpot”, for example, the symbol combination “777” set as the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols is arranged in an active line. Or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than “777” are arranged on the active line is displayed. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, there is a state in which symbol combinations such as “333”, which are set in advance as the symbol combinations indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot, are arranged in an active line. Or a state in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” and “333” are arranged on the active line. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R regular jackpot”, combinations of symbols indicating a probable variation jackpot, such as “222” and “444”, which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols. A state in which combinations of the same symbols other than are arranged on an active line is displayed. Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is “out”, a state in which different combinations of main symbols are arranged on the active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a game variation effect indicating the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, together with a symbol variation display in each game cycle. When the result of the jackpot lottery is “16R probability variation jackpot”, when a state where the jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line is displayed, the game round effect is 5R. A suggestion effect that suggests a promising jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the game time effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the game time jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the jackpot lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, if a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R is given as a game round effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that it is usually a big hit is executed. In this case, in the game time effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game time is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

  Further, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. In the present embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the 1R round game to the end of the 1R round game in the opening / closing execution mode) elapses in the symbol display unit 341 from the start of execution of the opening / closing execution mode effect. Until then, the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) that enables selection of music output from the speaker 26 as the jackpot game effect is displayed. Hereinafter, the period during which the music selection image 83 is displayed may be referred to as a music selection effective period. On the other hand, when the game turn effect or the jackpot game effect is not displayed (in the non-game state), the game setting image can be displayed by the player's operation on the operation button 20 and is selected based on the game setting image. It is possible to perform game setting by operating the determination unit 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and a determination button 21B). Details of the music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23) in the jackpot game effect (hit game state) and the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15) in the non-game state will be described later.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the operation unit 310 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the operating unit 310 using a magnet is performed, the cheating can be detected.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 and on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the detection sensor 314a or the detection sensor 315a and erroneously detecting the entrance of a game ball is performed, the cheating can be detected. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example. Similarly, a radio wave sensor 36 may be provided in the vicinity of the special prize opening 319b.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 disposed in the upper right part of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays a result of a lottery as to whether or not to release the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 by a lighting pattern with a winning to the through gate 317 as a trigger. In the 7-segment display 372, a change display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the first operating port 314 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, a change display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the variable display hold number N and the hold number M generated by winning the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9 (see FIG. 5). The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to various control devices and various driving means provided in the gaming machine 10. To do.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 is an example of main control means including the main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. Main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the main control device 4 and outputs control signals from the main control device 4. The input / output I / F 42 is connected to ball sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball entering the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. Judging. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of fraudulent acts using magnets or radio waves based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Furthermore, an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42.

  Then, the MPU 41 outputs various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command to the voice lamp control device 5. For example, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the result of the big hit lottery and the variation display time, and is stored in a later-described holding storage area 412b when the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. And is output to the sound lamp control device 5. The number-of-holds command is used to notify the number-of-holds N or the number of holds M after the increase when the number-of-holds N or the number-of-holds M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. Is output. The first hold command and the second hold command are output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the hold number N or the hold number M currently stored in a hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, increases. When N or the number M of holdings decreases, it outputs to the sound lamp control apparatus 5 in order to notify the number N of holdings or the number M of holdings after the decrease. The jackpot start command is output to the sound lamp control device 5 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot end command is output to the sound lamp control device 5 when the jackpot gaming state ends. Various other commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 receives a main timer allocation which will be described later each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operation clocks of various control entities in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various processes executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting various commands transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, an electrical configuration for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the various counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the holding storage area 412b, and the electronic utility holding area 412c in the RAM 412 to execute a lottery lottery, a setting of a variable display time, and the like.

  The lottery counter includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot winning, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outage type. It is. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal hit random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric charge 315b of the second working port 315 is set to the electric open state and the initial value setting of the normal win random number counter C4 are set. And a normal initial value counter CIN2 to be used. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at a short time interval by the MPU 41 and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting a jackpot lottery and a variable display time.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of game times in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the change and stops is referred to as a first special figure game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of game times in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display may be referred to as a second special figure game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first operation port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operation port 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is described above. It is acquired as the success / failure information used in the success / failure determination, and is stored in any of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The success / failure information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as a success / failure information acquisition processing unit by executing processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a variable type counter CS1, etc.) is individually provided for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 includes the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

  Therefore, the jackpot in the game times executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. In addition to the determination of success / failure, the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be determined in advance.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation port 314, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. Is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number in which the success / failure information is stored among the first to-hold areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number-of-holds N.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second operation port 315, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reserved number storage area NAB, the number of pieces of information that are stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 is stored as the reserved number M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operation port 314 is configured by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. In addition, it is possible to hold a maximum of four pieces of the success / failure information as winning histories of game balls to the second operation port 315.

  In addition, it can be considered as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common with the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and even in this case, up to a maximum of 8 is also possible. It is possible to hold the success / failure information as a winning history. The storing process of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as a hold processing unit by executing a process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving each value of the validity information stored in the. Specifically, each value of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and each value does not exist in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the reserved number storage area NAB is 0, each value of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  It should be noted that the difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. In another embodiment, the values of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one game round, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery based on various numerical information stored as the success / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The success / failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is shifted to the first reserved area REB1, and the third reserved The success / failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 738, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined based on a winning / non-accepting table stored in the determining table storage area in the ROM 411, a low probability mode (first gaming state) that is a normal gaming state and a high probability mode (second gaming) that is a probability changing gaming state. Two types are set corresponding to the (state). FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, the number of random numbers that are jackpot winning in the low probability mode is two (373, 727), and the random number values that are jackpot winning in the high probability mode are The number is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the two random numbers (373, 727) that are the winning jackpots are common, but may not be common. Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the result of the jackpot lottery is lost.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411. FIG. 7C shows an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7C, when the type of game times is the first special figure game, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of game times is the second special figure game, the number of random numbers for 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers for 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14. Yes, the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 to 15-19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability variation big hit in the first special figure game and the second special figure game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation big hit in the second special figure game is set higher than that in the first special game. In other words, in the probability change short game state, compared to the normal game state such as the normal time short game state and the normal non-short time game state, the expected value of the game ball to be obtained when the result of the success / failure determination in the jackpot lottery wins is high. Is set.

  In the present embodiment, the first operation port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special game by winning the game ball, and the second operation port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special game by winning the game ball. A separate distribution table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, but the first special figure game and It is conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the second special figure game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability changing machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, a kind-two-mixer, or the like.

  Based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot lottery results are “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variable jackpot”, “5R normal jackpot” , And “out”.

  Here, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. When the jackpot lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to a probability variation time-short mode which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. The probability variation time-saving mode is continued until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game is executed in the normal time reduction mode which is the low probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is low and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high after the jackpot game ends. The high-frequency support mode in the normal time reduction mode is continued until a preset number of times, for example, 50 or 100 jackpot lotteries are completed.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, a jackpot of a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game at the time of probability changing big hit. The lottery is executed in the probability variation time-short mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and then the low probability mode is entered, and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation time-short mode to the normal time-short mode or the low probability mode in each game time. If the jackpot lottery result is out of play, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state or the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the variable display stop result displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the result of the big hit lottery is out of place. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of outliers, ie, the reach other than before and after detachment where the final stop symbol is other than before and after the reach symbol, and the complete detachment where no reach occurs. Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the detachment type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7D, the random number value that becomes the front / rear out of reach is 0 to 8, the random number value other than the front / rear reach is 9 to 38, and the random number value that is completely out of the range is 39. ~ 238. It should be noted that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times won for the 5R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot, that is, the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, the reach is a fluctuation state in which a state that is likely to be a big win is shown after the symbol fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341 is started until the symbol is stopped and displayed. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach fluctuation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation level, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. Person-participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is possible that the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed or displayed in a reduced size.

  For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination reservation area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 412c. For example, it is conceivable that the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that the winning combination is lost when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 determines a rough fluctuation type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process, which will be described later, is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, or a deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided individually for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  FIG. 7E, FIG. 7F, and FIG. 7G are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table. As shown in FIGS. 7E, 7F, and 7G, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated in advance. When the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 has a normal jackpot fluctuation table. ", The deviation variation table is referred to, and the type of variation pattern is specified.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 7E and 7F, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in a normal reach mode in which the variation display time is 30 s. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs variation display in a super reach manner in which the variation display time is 60 s. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in a special reach mode in which the variation display time is 90 s, which is the longest. Note that the type of variation pattern is not limited to these. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach having different characters or stories are prepared as the normal reach corresponding to the variation pattern “01”, and any one of the normal reach selected from the normal reach is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as a super reach corresponding to the variation pattern “02”, a plurality of types of super reach having different characters and stories are prepared, and one of the super reach selected from the super reach is executed. The Super Reach is a reach that has a longer variation time than normal reach and a shorter variation time than special reach, and has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than normal reach, and a low probability of winning a jackpot than special reach It is executed when suggesting to a person.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach corresponding to the variation pattern “03”, a plurality of types of special reach having different characters and stories are prepared, and any one of the special reach selected from the special reach is executed. The Special reach is a reach that has a longer variation time than normal reach and super reach, and includes, for example, effects that develop from normal reach or super reach.

  It should be noted that the reach corresponding to various fluctuation patterns includes a single operation effect in which a single operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a continuous operation operation effect in which the continuous operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. In addition, a player participation type operation effect process such as a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7G, in the deviation variation table, the variation type for each stop type at the time of deviation (rear and forward deviation reach, reach other than front and rear deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of departure is reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth, any of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely out of the range, either the variation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes variation display without reach with a variation display time of 7 s. When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display without reach with the variation display time of 10 s.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of departure corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display of the variation pattern in which the variation display is removed without a notice effect such as a character and a message being displayed is stopped. Is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as a change display at the time of release corresponding to the change pattern “05”, the change display of the release pattern that stops the display with the change display is accompanied by a notice effect such as a character and a message. Executed. Further, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type notice display reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed.

  Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result is sent to the voice lamp control device. Enter 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” with a change pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot”. Any one of “A01” to “A03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “B03” is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “C03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 adds fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the fluctuation patterns are “01” to “05” before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. One of the following is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the lottery result and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the lottery result and the fluctuation pattern. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in the above are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Let

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process for determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and various variation tables for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform the big hit lottery. Moreover, since the details of the variation mode that is actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, symbol variation display and symbol display on the symbol display unit 341. It is an example of the sub control means which performs effect display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sound used for various effects or lamp lighting patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various processes executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that the display control device 6 is based on various commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4. A command (control signal) is input to, and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the MPU 51 executes a game round effect (step S1709 in FIG. 15) and a jackpot game effect (step S1710 in FIG. 15), the display of the symbol display unit 341, the playback audio output from the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27 lighting modes are controlled. In one example, the MPU 51 executes output of music from the speaker 26 and display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives various commands from the main control device 4 and inputs the various commands to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26 and an electrical decoration unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on various commands input from the main control device 4. It is. Further, the operation switch 20, the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the determination operation switch 21Ba are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Thereby, MPU51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26, the lighting aspect of the electrical decoration part 27, etc. based on operation of the operation button 20, several selection button 21A (211 to 214), and the determination button 21B. It is also possible.

  The MPU 51 performs a predetermined operation based on various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command input from the main control device 4. Perform arithmetic processing.

  Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 changes the variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 20B)), and production based on the variation pattern command. The type (see FIGS. 21A to 21C) is determined (see steps S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 19), and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6, and the symbol display unit The symbol variation display at 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed. When a variation pattern command indicates 5R probability jackpot, a combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability jackpot Is displayed and a combination of main symbols corresponding to 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability jackpot or 16R probability jackpot is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on various commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also incorporates various circuits such as a timer circuit that measures time and an interrupt circuit that receives an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The ROM 611 is used for various control programs, as well as for changing symbols such as main symbols used in the symbol change display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a loss effect image, and a jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as an opening effect image, an opening / closing effect image, an ending effect image, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25), a top menu image used in game settings, and various setting images developed from the top menu image are stored. Yes. Each image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image or a moving image. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes a variation display time of a variation symbol in addition to the type of image to be used and the display timing of each image. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays various images on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various processes executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71 and an input / output I / F 72. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various processes executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the dispensing control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount of money that is lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 32 increases as the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors and driving units, a + 5V voltage for logic used in various control devices, and the like. The power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the various control devices is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, various control devices can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, description of the startup process and the NMI interrupt process is omitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining detection states of various sensors or switches connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball to any of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and these counter values reach the maximum values. In this case, the counter value is cleared to zero.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process described later in connection with winning in the first working port 314 or the second working port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005).

  In the launch control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process to enable launching. In addition, when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball. It is a process to make. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric combination 315b of the second operating port 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. If the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29. It is judged that. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol random number counter C4 is 0 to 199 and determines that it is a normal symbol winning, and the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 250. It is judged that. When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate process, the MPU 315b opens the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win a game ball to the second operation port 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged in parallel.

[Start-up winning process of main controller 4]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operation port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the first operation port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106 if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes). On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 8, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 11). And the values of S1309) are stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the success / failure information before the success / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determining whether or not the jackpot is successful in a change start process (S1408 in FIG. 12) described later. Then, the first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command based on the confirmation result is executed. Details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operation port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the second operation port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S <b> 1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 obtains the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 8, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later, The data is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 confirms the contents of the success / failure information before the success / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is determined to be a jackpot success / failure determination target in a variation start process (S1408 in FIG. 12) described later. Then, the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command based on the confirmation result is executed. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 10, “first hold command” is read as “second hold command”, and “hold number N” is read as “hold number M”. Good.

[First hold command setting process of main controller 4]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or miss), a variation pattern, and the number N of hold. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is set based on a high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in a gaming state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) described later. The high probability mode flag is set on when the MPU 41 shifts to the high probability mode, and is set off when the MPU 41 shifts to the low probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B). Execute the validity determination. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A). The correctness determination is executed.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the processing is started from the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is determined that the read value is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the values of the big hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the success / failure information is stored in the third reserved storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 9, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 included in the success / failure information stored in the third reserved storage area RE3. The value of is read. Of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 9 is determined by the value of the hold count N stored in the hold count storage area NA. Is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hold number N to the first hold command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold included in the first hold command. By referring to the number N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 corresponds to the validity information stored in the first hold command. .

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result is out of place, the variation type counter CS1, and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  Note that the first hold command set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and step S1301 of the main process (see FIG. 11) described later that is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. Is transmitted together with other commands to the sound lamp controller 5 and then deleted. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, the main control process of the game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1306 are executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, for example, and the counter update process of steps S1307 to S1309 is executed with the remaining time.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits an output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process to each control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Execute. For example, when various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are set in the RAM 413, the sub control unit 332 Send the command to. Further, in step S1001 of FIG. 8, it is determined whether or not the winning detection information is stored in the RAM 413. If the winning detection information is stored in the RAM 413, a winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313 or the like based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 413. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out is set according to the winning.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time. Although the game turn control process will be described later, in the game turn control process, the aforementioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a change pattern command required for the display of the change of the symbol by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 8, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1309. Based on these values, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery lottery result and variation display time is set.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the jackpot lottery (see step S1604 in FIG. 14). In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 determines that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a short probability probability time gaming state, a low probability mode and a high frequency when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A transition is made to the normal short game state that is the support mode, the normal non-short game state that is not the high frequency support mode in the low probability mode, or the like.

  For example, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the game round for the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game including the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R probability variation jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag set to ON in step S1607, S1608 or S1609 of FIG. 14 described later is on at the end of the game round for the jackpot, The game state is shifted to the jackpot game state after the game round for the jackpot ends. Then, the MPU 41 opens the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 after opening the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming opening / closing execution mode, or When there is a predetermined maximum number of winnings, one round of opening / closing processing for closing the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 is repeatedly executed 5 or 16 times depending on the jackpot type.

  In addition, after the jackpot game is executed, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation short gaming state when the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot In this case, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the normal time short gaming state.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets a flag corresponding to the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the promiscuous short-time gaming state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the normal-time short gaming state. To do. Further, when the time reduction mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets a time reduction number (50 times or 100 times, etc.) set in advance as the execution time of the game time in the time reduction mode in the time reduction counter.

<Step S1306>
In step S <b> 1306, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the main display unit 37. By this display control process, the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display for the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is the main symbol indicating the lottery result. It will stop at the combination of. In addition, by the display control process, the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 executes the symbol variation display for a predetermined normal symbol variation display time, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won. Will stop. In the case of normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next main processing execution timing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing. If the MPU 41 determines that the next main process execution timing has arrived (step S1307: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes the above-described processes after S1301. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the next main process execution timing has not arrived (step S1307: No), the MPU 41 waits until the next main process execution timing arrives, that is, at the next main process execution timing. During the remaining time until the time until the execution timing of the next main process is determined (step S1307: Yes), step S1307, step S1308, and step S1309 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1, and then returns the process to step S1307.

[Game control process]
Here, the game times control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the big hit game, and if it is in the big hit game (step S1401: Yes), the game turn control process is terminated, and the big hit game is not in progress. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, whether or not a jackpot game is executed is determined based on a jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 turns on at the start of the jackpot game and turns off at the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON when the jackpot game is started, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command and transmits the jackpot game start command to the sound lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command and transmits the jackpot game end command to the sound lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed. If the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to Step S1407. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON in step S1614 (see FIG. 14) of the variation start process described later, and turned OFF in step S1405 when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). This is determined based on the variable display flag set in (1).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If the MPU 41 determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the game turn control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the combination of the main symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the game times in the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37. Display is performed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405). When the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1405, the MPU 41 ends the game turn control process.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 determines whether or not both the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB are zero. To do. Here, the MPU 41 ends the game number control process when both the number N of holds and the number M of holds are 0 (step S1406: Yes). On the other hand, when either one of the hold number N and the hold number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the validity information stored in the hold storage area 412b. If the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a change display based on the validity information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the game turn control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the holding number M corresponding to the second special figure game is 0. If the holding number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number M of holds is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
The MPU 41 decrements the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA by 1 (step S1502), and moves the success / failure information from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success / failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the fourth reservation area REA4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is shifted when the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is shifted when both or one of the holding number M and the holding number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, the MPU 41 executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 because it can be determined that the hold number N is not 0 when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No).

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the success / failure information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the validity information of the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the fourth reserved area REB4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time reduction mode flag that can be set to ON in the gaming state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to ON, and the time reduction mode flag is set to ON. If it has been set (step S1508: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the hour / hour counter (step S1509). On the other hand, when the time reduction mode flag is not set to ON (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 ends the data setting process.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time reduction mode flag to OFF (step S1511), and when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), The data setting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in the gaming state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to ON (step S1601), and the high probability mode flag is set to ON. Is set (step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1602. If the high probability mode flag is not set to ON (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, based on the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B), the MPU 41 corresponds to the jackpot winning in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the success / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE. Whether or not it is a value is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE is a jackpot win based on the low probability mode hit table (see FIG. 7A). It is determined whether or not the value is a corresponding value.

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a big hit. If the result of the determination is a jackpot (step S1604: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the validity information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 7C). (Step S1605), it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit (step S1606).

  When the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to ON (step S1607). The 5R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the success / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R probability variation jackpot. In step S1607, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game times in which the jackpot lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the success / failure information. The 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off at the end of the variation start process. In addition, when the process of step S1607 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1611.

  When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the success / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 16R probability variation jackpot. In step S1608, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game times in which the jackpot lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the success / failure information. The 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. In addition, when the process of step S1608 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1611.

  When the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the success / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R normal jackpot. In step S1609, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game times in which the result of the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot is also set based on the success / failure information. The 5R normal jackpot flag is set off at the end of the change start process. If the process of step S1609 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1611.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a big hit (step S1604: No), the MPU 41 sets the off flag on (step S1610). The out flag indicates whether or not the result of the big hit lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is out. In step S1610, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game times in which the result of the big hit lottery is out is also set based on the success / failure information. Note that the off flag is set to off at the end of the variation start process. Further, when the process of step S1610 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the game times in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 7E). Further, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 7F). Further, when the out flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the out variation table (see FIG. 7G).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in the game time and the variation pattern specified in step S1611 and stores the variation pattern command in the RAM 512. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 11) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “ordinary big hit”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating “5R normal big hit” to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of “A03” is set as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the MPU 41 adds any one of “B01” to “B03” to which “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is 5R probability variation big hit is added. Is set as the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” added to the variation patterns “01” to “03” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Is set as the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the variation patterns “01” to “08”. Set as a command. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, or complete out is included in the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops after the variation display time set in step S1611 elapses, in the state of the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 74.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the time of start-up of the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of power failure, etc. Explanation of these processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S1701), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702), a selection button operation detection process (step S1703), and a selection operation detection in the sub timer interrupt process. Pattern determination processing (step S1704), determination button operation detection processing (step S1705), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1706), counter update processing (step S1707), command determination processing (step S1708), game times effect processing ( Step S1709), jackpot game effect processing (step S1710), and game setting processing (step S1711) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, an operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation state of the last three operations at the 1 msec interval as the operation history of the operation button 20 is the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation button detection pattern judgment processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button detection pattern determination process, an operation for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the pattern flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed. When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1902, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the previous operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1903, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1904, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the second operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18A). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued.

<Step S1905>
If the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S1901: No), it determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Judgment is made (step S1905). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1906, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1907, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the first operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1910, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the first operation pattern The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18A). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation end of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 18A). Note that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection processing]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1703 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In the upper selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “upper selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the lower selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the lower selection button operation processing may be performed by replacing “operation detection flag” with “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the left selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the right selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 performs an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process. Run.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 performs an upper operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An upper operation pattern flag for determining an operation state with respect to the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the “operation detection flag” is set to “upper selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “upper selection operation pattern”. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. If it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 51 also displays the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 212 is set. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It should be noted that the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process includes “operation detection flag” as “lower selection operation detection flag” and “operation pattern flag” as “lower selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 detects the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “left selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times. When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 51 also displays the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when operation patterns other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, occur as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “right selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18E, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. If it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” are generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 51 also displays the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Determination button operation detection processing]
In the determination button operation detection process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the determination button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In the determination button operation detection process, the “operation detection flag” may be read as the “decision button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state for the determination button 21B from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining whether or not Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 generates the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation state for three times of the determination button 21B. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times, and the first determination is performed. The operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to off. The second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). .

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state for three times of the determination button 21B, and the first determination is made. The operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has ended). .

  Further, the MPU 51 sets all the first to third determination operation pattern flags when operation patterns other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., occur as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. Set to off. The MPU 51 determines that the determination button 21B is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 15, in the counter update process (step S1707), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter and the variable display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 100. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is being performed, that the fluctuation display on the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like. In the present embodiment, for example, the fluctuation display counter determines whether or not the fluctuation display screen 92 (see FIG. 53A) in which the fluctuation display of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 is stopped in step S3401 of FIG. In this case, it is referred to when it is determined in step S3501 in FIG. 57, step S3601 in FIG. 58, etc. whether or not the main symbol variation display is started in the symbol display unit 341.

[Command judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process (step S1708 in FIG. 15). In the command determination process, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S2001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2001: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. It should be noted that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2001, and is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it becomes a processing target. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2002>
In step S2002, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. If the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2002: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2003. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2002: No), the process proceeds to step S2006.

<Step S2003>
In step S2003, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation type and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 20A), a variation type table (see FIG. 20B), and an effect type table (preliminarily stored in the ROM 511). The variation pattern is determined based on the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 (see FIGS. 21A to 21C). In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type Is 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed last. It is a design. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 21A), a super reach effect table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 21B), and a special reach effect table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 21B). 21C) is included.

  FIG. 20A shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 20 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is determined. In FIG. 20A, the main symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), “777”. ”Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that it is a symbol combination other than“ 333 ”and“ 777 ”that indicates that either the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected. It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, there is no distribution of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “3” and “7” It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the symbol combination “333” or “777” indicating 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, there is no distribution of “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combination indicating 5R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combinations whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal jackpots can be stopped and displayed. If the main result other than “3” except “7” is determined as the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag on. . The first promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 5R probability change promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 5R probability change jackpot is in a state of suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot (the jackpot in FIG. 22). Step S2103 in the game effect determination process, Step S2501 in the initial temporary selection music output process in FIG. 37, Step S2701 in the temporary music selection output process in FIG. 40, Step S2803 in the selection music output process in FIG.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16-probable big hit”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, symbol combinations other than “777” that indicate 16R probability variation big hit can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination other than “777” symbol combination indicating that the main symbol stop display result indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stopped. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit” and “3” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to ON and “3” as the first stop symbol. When the main symbol other than “7” is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in a state where it is suggested that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot (the jackpot game in FIG. 22). Step S2106 in the effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial temporary selection music output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the temporary selection music output process in FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selection music output process in FIG. The third promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 16R probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in a state where it is suggested that the 5R is a normal jackpot (the jackpot in FIG. 22). Step S2109 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial temporary selection music output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the temporary music selection output process in FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selection music output process in FIG.

  Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol determined previously. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 in the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. Is done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 51 selects the outage type selected based on the outage type table (FIG. 7D) and the first stop determined earlier. A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the detachment type is front / rear detachment reach, the second stop symbol is determined as the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined as the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than front / rear detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is determined by the design. When the detachment type is complete detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 20B, the variation type table defines the variation display time and the variation type contents corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, the variation display command “A01” having the lottery result “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern “01” is associated with the variation display time “30 s” and the variation type “normal reach”. In addition, the variation display command “B02” having the lottery result “5R probability variation big hit” and the variation pattern “02” is associated with the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach”. The variation display command “C03” with the result “16-probable variation big hit” and the variation pattern “03” is associated with the variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach”. Further, the fluctuation pattern command “D04” with the lottery result “disappear” and the fluctuation pattern “04” is associated with the fluctuation display time “7 s” and the fluctuation type “no reach”, and the lottery result is The variation pattern command “D05” having “out” and the variation pattern “05” is associated with the variation display time “10 s” and the variation type “no reach”.

  Furthermore, FIG. 21A to FIG. 21C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect type table. The production type table is defined for each variation type. FIG. 21A is a normal reach production table when the variation type is normal reach, FIG. 21B is a super reach production table when the variation type is super reach, and FIG. It is a special reach production table in case a change classification is special reach. In this embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example. However, the number of types of effects may be six or more. In FIG. 21, the effect type table when the variation type is “no reach” is omitted.

  In the normal reach production table shown in FIG. 21A, the production types corresponding to the value of the production type counter according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and off) are “production X1” to “Direction X5” is defined. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is normal reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  In the super reach production table shown in FIG. 21B, “production Y1” to “production Y5” are defined as production types corresponding to the value of the production type counter according to the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Furthermore, in the special reach production table shown in FIG. 21C, “production Z1” to “production Z5” are defined as production types corresponding to the value of the production type counter according to the lottery result. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is special reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets a stop pattern combination of the main symbols determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, and the effect type counter, a display variation pattern command indicating the variation type and the effect type, and stores them in the RAM 512. Remember. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2005 described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes symbol variation display and effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. It should be noted that the display variation pattern command may include information on whether or not the jackpot is won.

<Step S2004>
In step S2004, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process (step S1707) in FIG. 15, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed based on the variation display counter, the remaining time of the variation display time, and the like. Can be determined. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2005>
In step S2005, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the contents of the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. Let The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol, the variation type, and the effect type determined in step S2003. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a main symbol variation image and effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses. The main symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next game time or processing corresponding to the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type and the effect type specified by the display variation pattern command are executed.

<Step S2006>
In step S2006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2006: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2007, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2006: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S2009.

<Step S2007>
When receiving the jackpot game start command, the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2007). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to perform the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later (step S2201).

<Step S2009>
In step S2009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2009: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2010, and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2009: No), processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S2011.

<Step S2010>
In step S2010, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON, for example, in step S2013, which will be described later, and is referred to when determining whether to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later. (Step S2216).

<Step S2011>
In step S2011, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a pending command. The hold command includes the first hold command and the second hold command as described above. The first hold command includes information for specifying the number N of the variable display generated by winning or winning the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the first operation port 314. The second hold command includes information for specifying the number of hold of the change display generated by winning type to or from the jackpot, the change pattern, and the winning to the second operation port 315. Here, when the received command is a pending command (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2012, and when the received command is not a pending command (step S2011: No), the processing proceeds to step S2013. Transition.

<Step S2012>
In step S2012, when the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type specified by the first hold command, or the missed hit type, the fluctuation pattern, the number of holds N, and the like in the fluctuation type area of the RAM 512. . Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type specified by the second hold command, or a failure type, a change pattern, the number of holds M, and the like in the change type area of the RAM 512.

<Step S2013>
In step S2013, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process after executing the process based on the other command received from the main control device 4. For example, the MPU 51 sets the opening / closing execution mode start flag to ON when receiving the opening / closing execution mode start command, and sets the opening / closing execution mode end flag to ON when receiving the opening / closing execution mode end command. Note that the opening / closing execution mode start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the opening effect and start the opening / closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later (steps S2206 to S2208). . On the other hand, the opening / closing execution mode end flag is referred to in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 23 described later when determining whether to end the opening / closing execution mode effect and start the ending effect (steps S2212 to S2214). .

[Big hit game production decision processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2007 in FIG. 19). In the jackpot game effect determination process, effects to be executed in the jackpot game such as an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening / closing execution mode effect to be executed in the jackpot game are determined.

<Step S2101>
In step S2101, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect to be executed after the transition to the jackpot game until the opening / closing execution mode is started. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed based on the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined opening effect type to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as an opening effect, the MPU 51 clearly indicates that when the symbol combination is “777”, it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and when the symbol combination is “333”, it indicates that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. When the suggestion effect and the symbol combination is a doublet other than “777” and “333”, an effect suggesting that 5R is a normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined not according to the jackpot type, but according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect to be executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends and before the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect according to the jackpot type based on the ending effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

  Here, the ending effect is to notify the player that the jackpot game is ended after the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In the ending effect, for example, information such as a jackpot lottery result in the game times that led to the jackpot game (description of a game state to be transferred after the jackpot game is finished) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, in the ending effect, the lottery result is a big hit in the normal short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the normal non-short time game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode). When the initial hit is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the short game state during probability variation that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the first hit is 5R In the case of a normal jackpot, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-short game state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates the transition to the promiscuous short game state is, for example, “OORUSH rush”. On the other hand, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-short-time gaming state is, for example, “chance zone entry”, and the number of time-savings is also displayed. In the ending effect when the lottery result is a big win in the short game state at the time of probability change, an image clearly indicating that the short game state at the time of probability change is again displayed on the symbol display unit 341. For example, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the promiscuous short game state is “continue XXRUSH”. In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of times of transition to the short game state at the time of probability change (for example, the number of continuations of RUSH) with respect to the first hit of the first time, and the image of the character that appeared in the jackpot effect at the game time leading to the jackpot game. It may be displayed on the display unit 341. An image indicating the number of times of transition to the short game state at the time of probability change and a character image are determined in this step S2102.

  Furthermore, in the ending effect, an image relating to the appearance of balls such as the number of balls played in the jackpot game and the total number of balls played in the retreat is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the ending effect may be a display of a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that a later-described reserved resort will be executed. These images are determined in step S2214 of the jackpot game effect process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag is set on. If the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2104, and the first If the 1 promotion effect flag is off (step S2103: No), the process proceeds to step S2106. The first promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot during or after execution of the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect suggesting that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. This indicates whether or not to execute. As for the first promotion effect flag, the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, and the symbol combination (symbol combinations other than “333” and “777”) suggesting 5R normal jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol. If the command is detected, it is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) suggesting a 5R normal jackpot as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect type information to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 determines the 5R probability variation promotion effect. The 5R probability change promotion effect is determined based on, for example, the 5R probability change promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits information on the type of the determined 5R probability change promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a probability change promotion effect command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag is set to ON. If the second promotion effect flag is ON (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, If the 2 promotion effect flag is off (step S2106: No), the process proceeds to step S2109. The second promotion effect flag is a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot during or after the execution of the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect suggesting that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot. It indicates whether or not to execute. This second promotion effect flag is a command determination in FIG. 19 when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and the symbol combination indicating 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol. It is set to ON in step S2003 in the process.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect (5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) suggesting 5R probability variation jackpot as an effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined opening / closing execution mode effect for 5R probability variation big hit as the opening / closing execution mode effect command to the display control device 6.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 determines the 16R promotion effect. The 16R promotion effect is determined based on, for example, a 16R promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the selected 16R promotion effect type information to the display control device 6 as a 16R promotion effect command.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third promotion effect flag is set on. If the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2109: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2110, and If the 3 promotion effect flag is off (step S2109: No), the process proceeds to step S2112. Whether the third promotion effect flag executes a 16R probability change promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot during or after the 5R normal jackpot suggestion effect suggesting that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot It indicates whether or not. In the third promotion effect flag, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and the symbol combination that suggests 5R normal jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol, step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is determined. Set to on.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, as in step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) that suggests a 5R normal jackpot as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and executes the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines the 16R probability variation promotion effect. The 16R probability variation promotion effect is determined based on, for example, a 16R probability variation promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the determined 16R probability change promotion effect type information to the display control device 6 as a 16R probability change promotion effect command.

<Step S2112>
In step S2112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R probability variable jackpot flag set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is ON (step S2112). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2113. If the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is off (step S2112: No), the process proceeds to step S2114.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, as in step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect (5R probability variable jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) suggesting 5R probability variation jackpot as an effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and executes the determined 5R probability variable jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command, and the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to OFF.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON. If the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is ON (step S2114). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2115, and if the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is off (step S2114: No), the process proceeds to step S2116.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines an effect (16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) suggesting a 16R probability variation jackpot as an effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the determined 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect type information as an opening / closing execution mode effect command to the display control device 6, and sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to OFF.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, as in step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) suggesting 5R normal jackpot as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and executes the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The mode effect type information is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command, and the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF.

[Big hit game effect processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process (step S1710 in FIG. 15). In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, the ending effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect and the like determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 22 are executed.

<Step S2201>
In step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2008 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is ON ( In step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Steps S2202 and S2203>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect start process (step S2202), and sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2203). In the opening effect start processing, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2101 in FIG. A command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image effect is transmitted.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called reserved resort is executed after the jackpot game is over. Reservation consecutive villas are jackpots (5R) as success / failure information in any of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB when the jackpot game is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the time saving mode. This is executed when information indicating that the probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) is included. In other words, the “holding consecutive villa” means that a jackpot game is generated within the number of games having an upper limit of the number M of holds at the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of holds M at the end of the jackpot game is 4, a case where a jackpot occurs within four game times is referred to as a “holding villa”. Whether or not the hold consecutive resort is executed can be determined by referring to the variation type area of the RAM 512, for example, and whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second hold command is stored.

  However, in step S2204, the variation type area is referred to at the stage where the opening effect is started, and it is determined whether or not the reserved villa is executed. That is, if the result of the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game effect until the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect is a jackpot, it is not an object to be determined for the reserved villa in step S2204. In addition, regarding the start winning of the game ball to the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect until the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect, for example, in the ending effect start process of step S2214 described later In the case of executing the reserved consecutive resort determination effect by determining whether or not the reserved consecutive resort determination effect that clearly indicates that the consecutive resort will be performed, in step S2102 of the jackpot game effect determination process (see FIG. 22). In the determined ending effect, the reserved consecutive resort confirmation effect is executed.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 sets the on-hold resort flag on, and ends the jackpot game effect process. The reserved consecutive flag is a 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 45) or 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery for determining a music selection button effect in step S2904 and step S2906 of the music selection button effect process of FIG. Referenced when selecting a table (see FIG. 48). Specifically, the reserved consecutive flag is set in steps S3003, S3008, S3014, and S3019 in the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process in FIG. 43, and steps S3103, S3108, S3114 in the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination process in FIG. Reference is made in S3119. In other words, the later-described reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect executes the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect for the reserved consecutive resort whose jackpot lottery result is the big hit before the opening effect is started. It should be noted that the determination in the previous step S2204 is made based on steps S3003, S3008, S3014 and S3019 of the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination processing in FIG. 43 described later, and steps S3103, S3108, S3114 and 16R probability variable selection button effect determination processing in FIG. You may make it perform in S3119. In this case, since the determination as to whether or not the reserved consecutive resort is executed is performed at the stage of determining the song selection button effect, the reserved consecutive resort in the lottery game during the jackpot game is the one until the song selection button effect is started. Since it becomes an object, the possibility that the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect will be executed is higher than in the case where it is determined whether the reserved consecutive resort is executed in the stage of starting the opening effect (step S2204). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved for a player who wants to know during the jackpot game that the reserved consecutive resort is executed. Moreover, you may perform a reservation consecutive resort confirmation effect in an ending effect as mentioned above. In this case, the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect is set so that the player does not execute the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect as the music selection button effect (step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing of FIG. 66 described later, or described later). It may be executed as a limited effect in the case where the reserved consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. Thereby, even if it is a case where a player has set non-execution with respect to a reserved consecutive resort finalization effect, it can be shown to a player that a reserved consecutive resort is performed.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode start flag set to ON in step S2013 in FIG. 19 is set to ON, and when the opening / closing execution mode start flag is ON (step S2206: Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S2207, and if the opening / closing execution mode start flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2212.

<Steps S2207 and S2208>
When the opening / closing execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect end process (step S2207), and executes an opening / closing execution mode effect start process (step S2208). That is, the MPU 51 ends the opening effect and starts the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S2104, S2107, S2110, S2113, S2115, or S2116 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG.

<Steps S2209 to S2211>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 executes a music selection image display process for displaying a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) for allowing the player to select a music output in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game effect. Next, the MPU 51 outputs an initial temporary selection music that outputs a music (initial temporary selection music) corresponding to the temporary selection music image 832 (initial temporary selection music image) initially displayed as the temporary selection music image 832 in the music selection image 83. Output processing is executed (step S2210). The provisionally selected music image 832 is selected by a determination operation on the determination button 21B by the player among a plurality of music (20 music in this embodiment) that can be output from the speaker 26 by the player's selection in the big hit state as described above. It is an image which shows that it is possible temporary selection music. In addition, the MPU 51 sets the opening / closing execution mode start flag to OFF (step S2211), and ends the jackpot game effect process. Details of the music selection image display process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the initial provisional selection music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2212>
In step S2212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode end flag set to ON in step S2013 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON. The process proceeds to step S2213, and if the open / close execution mode end flag is off (step S2212: No), the process proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2213>
When the opening / closing execution mode end flag is on (step S2212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the opening / closing execution mode effect end processing (step S2213). In the opening / closing execution mode effect end processing, the MPU 51 ends the execution of the image effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the output of the music from the speaker 26, for example.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
The MPU 51 executes the ending effect start process (step S2214), sets the open / close execution mode end flag to off (S2215), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 to start the ending effect determined in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the jackpot game effect determination process described above. Note that the MPU 51 displays an image relating to the appearance before starting the ending effect when displaying an image relating to the appearance such as the number of appearances in the jackpot game or the total number of appearances in the renso as the ending effect on the symbol display unit 341. decide. In addition, when the MPU 51 executes the reserved villa confirmation effect in the ending effect, the display of the reserved villa confirmation image on the symbol display unit 341 before the start of the ending effect, the output of the reserved villa confirmation sound from the speaker 26, and the like. Determine the rendezvous of the reserved villa.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2010 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON. If the jackpot game effect end flag is ON ( In step S2216: Yes, the process proceeds to step S2217. If the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the process proceeds to step S2219.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an ending effect end process (step S2217) and sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218). The production process ends.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
In step S2219, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection processing flag set to ON in step S2306 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 24 described later is set to ON, and the music selection processing flag is set. If it is on (step S2219: Yes), the music selection process is executed (step S2220). If the music selection process flag is off (step S2219: No), the jackpot game effect process is terminated. Details of the music selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Music selection image display processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection image display process (step S2209 in FIG. 23). In the music selection image display process, a music selection image 83 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for allowing the player to select a music output in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game effect (see FIG. 25). FIG. 25 is an example of a music selection image display screen 82 including a music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341. FIG. 25 shows a state in which an unselected music, which will be described later, in the music selection image 83 is provisionally selected. Hereinafter, an example of the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIG. 25, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 25, on the music selection image display screen 82, a music selection image 83, a selection determination part image 84, an operation explanation image 85, and a lyrics telop image 86 are displayed. Further, on the music selection image display screen 82, it is not essential to display an image other than the music selection image 83, and part or all of the image other than the music selection image 83 may not be displayed. Other images may be displayed in place of some or all of the other images.

  The music selection image 83 is used for allowing the player to select music to be output by the speaker 26 from a plurality of music prepared in advance (20 music A to T in this embodiment) to be output from the speaker 26. It is. A predetermined number (“10” in the present embodiment) is provided in advance for the number of music selection images 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and a part of the plurality of music pieces (20 in the present embodiment). The music selection image 83 for the 10 songs is displayed in a display area 837 set in advance in the symbol display unit 341. That is, the number of the plurality of music pieces is larger than the number of the music selection images 83 (the total number of the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833). In FIG. 25, music that is not displayed in the display area 837 among a plurality of music is indicated by a virtual line (reference numeral 838 in the figure). The number of the plurality of songs that can be output in the jackpot game is larger than the display upper limit number of the plurality of songs prepared in advance for output from the speaker 26. The number may be the same.

  The music selection image 83 includes an already selected music image 831, a temporarily selected music image 832, and an unselected music image 833 that are displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Here, being distinguishable from each other is not limited to the case where the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 itself can be distinguished. For example, the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed in the same manner, and these images 831, 832, 834 are marked (for example, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 in FIG. 25). This includes the case where the images can be distinguished from each other by adding an image such as.

  The selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the music has already been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music A, the music J, and the music D corresponds to the already selected music image 831. The temporarily selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the music is a temporarily selected music that can be selected by the determination operation performed on the determination button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music H corresponds to the temporary selection music image 832. The unselected music image 833 is an image indicating that the music is a music other than the already selected music and has not been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music K, the music L, the music M, the music I, the music B, and the music C corresponds to the unselected music image 833. However, as will be described later, there is an upper limit number (3 in the present embodiment) for the already selected music, and even if the music has already been selected by the player, the music exceeding the upper limit is already selected. It is processed not as a song but as an unselected song.

  In the music selection image 83, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed by the player performing an operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. Note that details of the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833, and details of an example of changing the temporarily selected music image 832 by the player's operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 will be described later. To do.

  In FIG. 25, for convenience of explanation, a case where the previously selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the non-selected music image 834 are simultaneously displayed as the music selection image 83 is shown. As will be described later, the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed in the music selection image 83 initially displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 26).

  These music images 831 to 833 (music selection image 83) are displayed in a display area 837 set on the left side of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the display area 837 is set to an area of 1/3 or less of the area of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341, preferably set to an area of 1/4 or less, more preferably 1/5 or less. Is set to the area. The display area 837 may be set to a part of the music selection image display screen 82, and is not necessarily set on the left side of the music selection image display screen 82. For example, the right side, upper side, It may be the lower side.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one in which a music selection image is displayed on the entire display screen or substantially the entire display screen. For example, there are images in which a plurality of rectangular music selection images are displayed in a matrix form over the entire display screen or substantially the entire display screen. In such a conventional gaming machine, the opening / closing execution mode effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 cannot be visually recognized while the music selection image is displayed on the display screen, and the opening / closing execution mode effect is displayed during music selection. I can't enjoy it.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the display area 837 is set to a part of the music selection image display screen 82 (left side in the present embodiment). Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, even when the music selection image 83 is displayed, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing mode effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect can be enjoyed even while the music is being selected. it can.

  In the display area 837, the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed side by side in this order. Specifically, in the music selection image 83, from the top in the display area 837, up to the third is the already selected music image 831, the fourth is the temporarily selected music image 832, and the remaining six are the unselected music images 833. . In the music selection image 83 arranged in this way, the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed between the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. Note that the music selection image 83 is not limited to a display mode in which a plurality of music selection images 83 are arranged vertically in the display area 837, but may be a display mode in which the music selection images 83 are arranged side by side, diagonally, in a matrix, or the like.

  The selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the music has already been selected by the player. The previously selected music image 831 includes the temporarily selected music image 832 and the non-selected music image 832 depending on the color, size, shape, and the like of the effect around the contour portion in addition to the color, pattern, and pattern of the contour portion such as a frame, the character portion, and the character background portion. The selected music image 833 is displayed so as to be distinguishable. In addition, an upper limit number is predetermined for the number of selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of already selected music image 831 is three. The upper limit is not limited to 3, but may be 1, but it is preferable to select from 2 or more. However, the upper limit number of the selected music image 831 takes into consideration the number of images 831 to 834 displayed as the music selection image 83, ease of selection when selecting the selected music based on the selected music image 831, and the like. In this case, it is preferable to select from the range of 2-5.

  The display order (music ranking) is given to the selected music image 831. In the present embodiment, the display order is increased in the order of the music selection date and time, and the already selected music having a higher display order is displayed at a position closer to the temporarily selected music image 832 in the initial music selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, the selected music images 831 for the music A, the music J, and the music D, which are the selected music, are displayed in the display area 837 at positions from the top to the third in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. ing. That is, the music selection date and time of music A, music J and music D among the plurality of music are new in this order. In the present embodiment, the already-selected music image 831 is displayed in a predetermined area while the music selection image 83 is displayed. Specifically, the already-selected music image 831 is fixedly displayed at positions from the top to the third in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83, and even when the temporary selection image 832 described later is changed. The position of the selected music image 831 does not change. However, when the previously selected music is provisionally selected, the music selection image 83 for the temporarily selected music as described later is displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 instead of the previously selected music image 831 (see FIG. 27 (A) to FIG. 27 (C)).

  The display order for the selected music image 831 may be given based on conditions other than the selection date and time, for example, the selection frequency. The selection frequency is, for example, the cumulative selection number, the selection number in the most recent predetermined number (for example, 10 times), or the selection rate in the most recent predetermined number. In the following, “selection frequency” is used in the same meaning.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in the example of FIG. 25, “Good” in the example of FIG. 25) is attached to the side of the selected music image 831, and is distinguished from the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833. Has been facilitated. However, the selected music image 831 may be distinguished from the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833, the predetermined mark may be omitted, and the selected music image 831 is temporarily selected. The same display mode as that of the music image 832 or the unselected music image 833 may be used to distinguish only by the predetermined mark, and there is no limitation on the display mode.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the temporarily selected music can be distinguished from the other music, but the image for the temporarily selected music was displayed in the same manner including the previously selected music. . On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selected music image 831 for the selected music is distinguished from the unselected music image 832 for the unselected music. Can be distinguished from unselected music. As a result, the selected music can be easily found and the operation of selecting the selected music is facilitated. In addition, when the display position of the selected music image 831 is set as a predetermined area and the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed adjacent to the lower side of the selected music image 831, the player displays the music selection image 83. In this case, it is possible to easily find the previously selected musical piece that has been selected most recently, and to select the musical piece that has been selected most recently by operating the selection determination unit 21. Furthermore, since the display order is given to the selected music and the initial music selection image 83 is displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image 832 in the descending order of the display order, the upper limit number of the selected music includes the same music. It will never be. Therefore, for example, when the player has repeatedly selected the same music and wants to select a previously selected music other than the music, the player can easily find the selected music to be selected. Thereby, the operation burden when the player selects the previously selected music again is reduced.

  In addition, as will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to select a plurality of music pieces for a single jackpot game within a predetermined music selection effective period (for example, a period in which the 1R opening / closing execution mode is executed). However, when a plurality of music selections are performed in one jackpot game, only the last selected music selected last is set as the already selected music (step S2813 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41). . When the number of selected songs is less than the upper limit, for example, when the number of selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of selected music images 831 corresponding to the number of selected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of selected songs is 0, or when the player has set not to display the selected song image 831 as will be described later (step S4013 of the song list display setting process in FIG. 63, or If the selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen process in FIG. 71), the selected music image 831 is not displayed. At this time, an unselected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 is displayed for the number of already selected music less than the upper limit number. Thereby, even when the number of displayed selected music images 831 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit number, by displaying the unselected music image 833 instead of the selected music image 831, A prescribed number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or deficiency.

  The temporarily selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the music is a temporarily selected music that can be selected by the determination operation performed on the determination button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music H is the temporarily selected music, and the temporarily selected music image 832 can be distinguished from the previously selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. The temporary selection music image 832 is provided with a predetermined mark (indicator image 835 of “temporary” in this embodiment) on the side, and a cursor image 836 for emphasizing that it is the temporary selection music image 832. Surrounded by

  Note that the temporarily selected music image 832 only needs to be distinguishable from the previously selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. The predetermined mark may be omitted, or the temporarily selected music image 832 may be selected. Only the predetermined mark may be displayed in the same display manner as the music image 831 and the unselected music image 833, and there is no restriction on the display manner.

  In addition, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed according to an operation by the player on the selection determination unit 21. In the present embodiment, when the already selected music image 831 is displayed, a predetermined area, that is, the already selected music image 831 is displayed at the top to the third position in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. Therefore, the change mode of the temporarily selected music image 832 differs depending on whether the previously selected music is temporarily selected or not selected. Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an initial display example of the music selection image 83, and FIGS. 27A to 27C are diagrams illustrating examples of changing the temporarily selected music image 832 in the already selected music. is there. Moreover, in FIG.26 and FIG.27 (A)-FIG.27 (C), only the part of the display area 837 of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display part 341 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when temporarily selecting music from unselected music, the lower selection button 212 is operated. By doing so, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain the same, and the unselected music image 833 is scrolled downward. In the example shown in FIG. 26, by operating the lower selection button 212, the temporarily selected music is looped and changed in the order of music P → music T → music S →... → music F → music E → music P. . Further, when a desired unselected music is temporarily selected, the unselected music can be output as a selected music from the speaker 26 by operating the decision button 21B.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the music selection image 83 initially displayed on the symbol display unit 341, in the music loop when the music is temporarily selected from the unselected music, the non-selected music (non-selected image 834). Is arranged at a position farthest from the initial temporary selection music image 832 (initial temporary selection music).

  On the other hand, when the music is temporarily selected from the already selected music, the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 is operated. Specifically, first, when the upper selection button 211 is operated once in the state shown in FIG. 26, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are obtained from the music selection image 83 for the music P as shown in FIG. It moves to the music selection image 83 for the music A displayed one above the music P. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for the music P is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the unselected music image 833, while the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the previously selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Is done. In addition, by performing an operation on the determination button 21B, it is possible to select the temporarily selected music A (already selected music).

  In addition, when the upper selection button 211 is operated once in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed from the music selection image 83 for the music A to the music J as shown in FIG. Move to the music selection image 83. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the already selected music image 831, while the music selection image 83 for the music J is changed from the previously selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Is done. In addition, by performing an operation on the determination button 21B, it is possible to select the temporarily selected music J (already selected music).

  Similarly, when the upper operation button 211 is operated once in the state shown in FIG. 27B, the music selection image 83 for the music J is selected from the temporarily selected music image 832 as shown in FIG. While being changed to the image 831, the music selection image 83 for the music D is changed from the previously selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Thereby, it becomes possible to select the temporarily selected music D (already selected music) by performing an operation on the decision button 21B. Even if the upper selection button 211 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 27C, the temporarily selected music image 832 is not changed, and the state where the music D is temporarily selected is maintained.

  On the other hand, by operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27B or FIG. 27C, the indicator image 835 and The cursor image 836 moves to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the next lower music, the temporarily selected music is changed, and the operation on the decision button 21B is performed to select the temporarily selected music A or J It becomes possible to do.

  In addition, by operating the down operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 become the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music P that is the next unselected music. As it moves, the temporarily selected music is changed. Accordingly, as described with reference to FIG. 26, the music is provisionally selected from the unselected music by operating the lower selection button 212, and the unselected music is selected by operating the decision button 21B. The sound can be output from the speaker 26.

  By the way, as a gaming machine conventionally, there is a gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment that can select a music to be output during a jackpot game from a plurality of music. The number of songs that can be selected in the jackpot game differs depending on the model, but some songs can be selected from more than 20 songs to be output during the special game. When the number of songs that can be selected is large, the range of music selection becomes large, so that not only various music can be enjoyed, but also the possibility that music that matches the player's preference is included. Therefore, in game machines that allow selection of songs during a jackpot game, the player can listen to various songs, and the player can find a favorite song to improve the attention to the jackpot game and the interest of special games. Can improve game motivation.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the temporarily selected music is displayed separately from the image for the other music. Despite being displayed, the images for the non-selected music that was not selected by the player were displayed without distinction from each other. Therefore, it becomes difficult to find the target song when you want to repeatedly select the player's favorite song or listen to the previously selected song again, and even if you find the target song, find the target song It is forced to do troublesome operation. The difficulty of finding such a target song increases as the number of selectable songs increases. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a period during which a song that is output during a big hit game can be selected (a music selection effective period) is set. For example, there is a gaming machine in which the music selection valid period is limited to the opening effect in the jackpot game or the end of the first round of the round game (opening / closing execution mode). In such a game machine, it is more difficult to find the target music because the target music has to be searched for within a limited period of time that is not so long. In addition, when it is difficult and difficult to select a target song in the jackpot game, there is a concern that the player may not select a song in the jackpot game. This will improve the degree of interest and interest in the jackpot game by preparing multiple songs and letting the player select the songs to listen to various songs, and letting the player find the favorite songs The purpose of improving game motivation is buried.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the music selection image 83 for allowing the player to select a music, the already selected music that has been selected by the player has already been selected. The music image 831 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so as to be distinguishable from the unselected music image 833. Thus, since the selected music image 831 can be distinguished from the unselected music image 833, the player can select from the music selection images 83 when selecting a previously selected music that has been selected before. Based on the selected music image 831, the selected music can be temporarily selected and selected. Specifically, the player operates the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 of the selection determination unit 21 while confirming the position of the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83, thereby selecting the selected music. Temporarily selected and displayed as a temporarily selected music image 832. In this state, by operating the determination button 21B, the selected music can be output from the speaker 26 as the selected music again. Therefore, a player can easily find a previously selected song even if there are a large number of songs that can be selected, for example, when the user wants to repeatedly select a favorite song or listens to a previously selected song again. Can do. In addition, it is possible to efficiently select a previously selected song that was previously selected with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 and output the selected song from the speaker 26.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed between the previously selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833 in the music selection image 83, and the previously selected image is displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832. Both the image 831 and the unselected image 833 are displayed adjacent to each other. Therefore, the player can change the temporarily selected music image 832 in the music selection image 832 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, and select the previously selected music that has been selected before and the previously selected music. Even when any of the unselected music pieces that have not been selected is selected, the target music piece can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. As a result, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to various types of players, such as a player who tends to repeatedly select a previously selected song, and a player who tends to select an unselected song. The target music can be selected with a small number of operations.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the unselected music image 833 is an image indicating that the music is other than the already selected music. In the example of FIG. 25, music K, music L, music M, music I, music B, and music C are unselected music. The unselected music image 833 is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the already selected music image 831 and the temporarily selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 includes a non-selected music image 834 indicating that it is a non-selected music. The non-selected music is music that has not been selected by the player despite being initially displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, music I, music B, and music C are non-selected music. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed in the unselected music image 833 depending on the color, size, shape, and the like of the effect around the contour portion, in addition to the color, pattern, and pattern of the contour portion such as a frame, character portion, and character background portion. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed in a distinguishable manner. In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in the present embodiment, “dislike” characters) is attached to the side of the non-selected music image 834, so that it is easy to distinguish the non-selected music image 834. However, the non-selected music image 834 only needs to be distinguishable, the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the non-selected music image 834 may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark, and the display mode is not limited. Absent.

  Further, an upper limit number is predetermined for the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 is three. Note that the upper limit number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 may be other than 3 as in the case of the already selected music image 831. When the number of non-selected songs is less than the upper limit number, for example, when the number of non-selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of non-selected song images 834 corresponding to the number of non-selected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of non-selected music is 0, or when the player has set not to display the non-selected music image 834 as described later (step S4013 of the music list display setting process in FIG. 63, or If the non-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71), the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed. In the case where the non-selected music image 834 is displayed, if the number of non-selected music is less than the upper limit, an unselected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 is displayed for the shortage. In this way, even when the number of non-selected music images 834 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit number, unselected music other than the non-selected music images 834 is used instead of the non-selected music images 834. By displaying the image 833, the prescribed number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or deficiency.

  The selection determination part image 84 is an image simulating the selection determination part 21, and shows that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The operation explanation image 85 explains that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 and can be determined as a music to be output from the speaker 26 by operating the decision button 21B. Is. The lyrics telop image 86 displays the temporarily selected music output from the speaker 26 or the lyrics of the music selected by the player in accordance with the output of the music. However, the selection determination part image 84, the operation explanation image 85, and the lyrics telop image 86 are not essential images, and all or a part of them may be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the music is selected by the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 has been described as an example, but in addition to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213 and the right selection button The music may be selected using 214. For example, the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are used for selecting music from unselected music, and the left selection button 213 and the right selection button 214 are used for selecting music from already selected music. Also good. In this case, for example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain unchanged, the unselected music image 833 is scrolled upward, and the lower selection button 212 is operated, The selected music image 833 is scrolled downward, and the music selection image 83 moved to the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 is changed from the unselected music image 833 to the temporarily selected music image 832. On the other hand, when the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move upward or downward, and the music selection image 83 for the already selected music is used as the temporarily selected music image 832. You may make it display.

  In this embodiment, the display position of the selected music image 831 is determined in advance. However, as shown in FIG. 28, for example, the selected music image 831 is not yet displayed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The selected music image 833 may be scrolled in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2. In this way, compared with the case where the temporarily selected music is changed by the method described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the previously selected music and the unselected music are not used without using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 separately. Since the music can be temporarily selected from any of the selected music, the operability when temporarily selecting the music is improved. As shown in FIG. 28, even when the selected music image 831 is scrolled in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2 together with the unselected music image 833 by the operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, first. In the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is preferable that the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) is arranged at a position farthest from the initial temporary selection music image 832 (initial temporary selection music).

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2301, the MPU 51 creates an already selected music list in order to display the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 also creates a non-selected music list (step S2302). The already selected music list and the non-selected music list are referred to when creating an initial arrangement order data table (see FIG. 31) for a music selection image 83 to be described later, and are stored in, for example, the RAM 512 shown in FIG. It can be created from the music selection counter data table.

  FIG. 29 is an example of a music selection counter data table for a plurality of music that can be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 29, the music selection counter data table includes a selection number counter, history data related to a previously selected music, and history data related to a non-selected music. In the music selection counter data table, the music for which the selected flag is set to off is data relating to the unselected music, and the data for which the non-selected flag is set to on is included in this data. It is data about. This music selection counter data table is updated by a music selection counter data update process of FIG. Details regarding the update of the music selection counter data table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The selection counter is selected by the player as music to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot gaming effect from a predetermined starting point (for example, when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to 20 songs of the songs A to T. This indicates the number of selections made. In the present embodiment, the music rank of the selected music is determined based on the selected date and time, but when the music rank of the selected music is determined by the selection frequency, the music rank is determined with reference to the selection number counter. .

  The history data related to the selected music is composed of music ranking data and a selected flag for each of music A to music T.

  The music rank data specifies the display position of the previously selected music image 831. The most recently selected date and time are assigned in ascending order, and the display rank is increased. Specifically, as the display order of the selected music, the first to third ranks are assigned to the top three songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, “1”, “2”, or “3” is indicated according to the display order, and “0” is indicated when there is no order. That is, the display order of the selected music is 1st music A, 2nd music J, 3rd music D, and the remaining music other than music A, music J, and music D are not ranked. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs (a state in which no song selection is performed), all the songs are ranked as unranked. Also, if there are two songs that correspond to the top three songs, only the first and second positions are determined without determining the third place, and similarly, if the music that corresponds to the top three songs is one song, Only the first place is determined without determining the second and third places.

  The already selected flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 decides to set the already selected flag to ON for a song to which any one of the first to third display ranks is assigned in the music selection counter data update process of FIG. It is determined that the already selected flag is set to OFF for music that does not exist. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data related to the selected music in the music selection counter data table, and displays it as the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. Create a list of selected songs.

  On the other hand, the history data related to the non-selected music includes music rank data and non-selection flags for each of music A to music T.

  The music rank data specifies the display position of the non-selected music image 834, and is assigned a lower rank in the order of date and time not recently selected, and the display rank is increased. As the display order of the non-selected music, the first to third ranks are assigned to the top three songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, the display order of the non-selected music is 1st music C, 2nd music B, 3rd music I, and the remaining music other than music C, music B, and music I. Is unordered. In addition, when there is no music corresponding to the top three songs, all the songs are not ranked. Also, if there are two songs that correspond to the top three songs, only the first and second positions are determined without determining the third place, and similarly, if the music that corresponds to the top three songs is one song, Only the first place is determined without determining the second and third places.

  The non-selection flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the music selection image 83 as the non-selection music image 834. The MPU 51 decides to set the non-selection flag to ON for a song to which any one of the first to third display ranks is assigned in the music selection counter data update process of FIG. It is determined that the already selected flag is set to OFF for music that does not exist. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table, and displays it as the non-selected music image 834 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. Create a non-selected song list.

  Note that the MPU 51 may assign a lower rank in descending order of the selection frequency (for example, the cumulative selection number or the selection rate at the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) from the latest) in the history data regarding the already selected music and the non-selected music. The display order may be the number of other songs without limiting the upper limit of 3 songs as in the illustrated example. For example, priority may be assigned to all the music pieces.

<Step S2303>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2303, the MPU 51 determines the temporary selection music (initial temporary selection music) when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after shifting to the jackpot game. The selected song determination process is executed. Details of the initial provisional selection song determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the initial temporary selection music determination process in step S2303 is completed, the MPU 51 stores the initial temporary selection music determined in step S2303 in the RAM 512 (step S2304), and executes the initial music selection image display process (step S2305). The initial temporary selection music stored in step S2304 is referred to when it is determined whether or not the initial temporary selection music has been selected in step S3202 in the music selection counter data update process of FIG. Further, in the initial music selection image display process in step S2305, the MPU 51 determines an initial arrangement for a plurality of music pieces, and transmits initial arrangement rank data regarding the initial arrangement to the symbol display unit 341. The initial arrangement is determined based on, for example, the selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30B, and the initial provisionally selected music determined in step S2303 in FIG. The

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an initial arrangement order data table related to the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs for displaying the song selection image 83, and FIG. 32 is an example of the initial arrangement of the song selection image 83. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the initial array rank data table is a table of the initial array rank data, and includes array rank data related to the initial array rank and additional data.

  The arrangement order data defines the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs A to T. The initial arrangement order is from 1st to 20th, from 1st to 3rd being assigned to the selected music, and from 11th to 13th being assigned to the non-selected music. Specifically, the first to third positions in the initial arrangement order are respectively assigned to the third, second and first positions of the selected music list order in the selected music list table shown in FIG. . According to the order of the selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, music D, music J, and music A are assigned to the first to third positions in the initial arrangement order, respectively. In addition, the 11th to 13th positions in the initial arrangement order are assigned to the first, second and third positions of the non-selected music rank in the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30 (B), respectively. According to the order of the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30B, music I, music B, and music C are assigned to the 11th to 13th positions in the initial arrangement order, respectively. In addition, the fourth place in the initial arrangement order is assigned to the temporarily selected music. The example shown in FIG. 31 indicates that the music P is determined as the temporarily selected music in step S2303 of FIG. In addition, the 5th to 10th positions and the 14th to 20th positions in the initial arrangement order are assigned to unselected music other than non-selected music. And the unselected music other than the non-selected music is assigned to the youngest rank among the 5th to 10th ranks and the 14th to 20th ranks in ascending order of the song numbers. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the music E is ranked 5th in the music ranking, the music F is ranked 6th in the music ranking, the music G is ranked 7th in the music ranking, the music H is ranked 8th in the music ranking, and the music K is The song ranking is 9th, the song L is the 10th song ranking, the song M is the 14th song ranking, the song N is the 15th song ranking, the song O is the 16th song ranking, and the song Q is The music ranking is assigned to the music ranking 17th, the music R is assigned to the music ranking 18th, the music S is assigned to the music ranking 19th, and the music T is assigned to the music ranking 20.

  On the other hand, the additional data includes music type data indicating whether the selected music, the provisionally selected music, the non-selected music, and the non-selected music other than the non-selected music, and the non-display setting for the selected music and the non-selected music. Data indicating whether the flag is set to ON or OFF is included. Here, the non-display setting flag for the selected music and the non-selected music is displayed in the same manner as the non-selected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 for each of the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834. This flag is set to ON when display is set by the player. In the present embodiment, the non-display setting flag is an already-selected music image non-display setting flag for displaying the already-selected music image 831 in a display manner similar to that of the non-selected music image 833, and the non-selected music image 834 is a non-selected music image. The non-selected music image non-display setting flag displayed in the same display manner as the non-selected music image 833 other than 834 is included. The selected music image non-display setting flag and the non-selected music image non-display setting flag are set in step S4013 of the music list display setting screen process shown in FIG. 63 described later or step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen process shown in FIG. Set to on.

  In the example of FIG. 31, the MPU 51 determines that the music A, the music J, and the music D are already selected music based on the additional data, that the non-display flag for the selected music is set to OFF, It can be specified that the music I and the music B are non-selected music, the non-display flag for the already selected music is set to OFF, and the music P is a temporarily selected music.

  Then, according to the initial arrangement order shown in FIG. 31, the initial arrangement for a plurality of pieces of music is in the order shown in FIG. 32. On the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341, as shown in FIGS. Displayed in various ways. In this embodiment, since the upper limit number of the music selection images 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 is 10, the music selection images 83 for the music from the first to the 10th in the initial arrangement order are displayed. The Further, since the non-display flag for the already selected music is set to OFF, the music selection image 83 is displayed as including the already selected music image 831. The non-selected music is initially arranged at a position farthest from the temporarily selected music because the initial arrangement order is assigned from 11th to 13th. That is, when creating the initial arrangement order data, the MPU 51 arranges the non-selected music at a position where the minimum number of operations for the selection button 21A necessary for making the non-selected music as the temporarily selected music is the largest. Further, the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the non-selected music is not displayed when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the player selects the non-selected music by operating the lower selection button 212. The image 833 is displayed by scrolling.

  In this embodiment, the previously selected music is assigned to the first to third positions of the initial arrangement order and the non-selected music is assigned to the 11th to 13th positions of the initial arrangement order. It is not necessary to collect a number of previously selected songs in one place, and similarly, it is not necessary to collect a maximum number of unselected songs in one place. For example, as shown in FIG. In addition, the upper limit number of non-selected songs may be discretely assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 34, a plurality of music pieces are arranged in the same music number, and the initial arrangement order of the plurality of music pieces is determined so that the initial arrangement order of the music piece P determined as the temporarily selected music piece is fourth. Has been.

<Step S2306>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2306, the MPU 51 sets the music selection processing flag to ON, and ends the music selection image display processing. For example, the music selection process flag is referred to when determining whether or not to continue the music selection process (step S2219 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23) and whether or not the music selection effective period has passed (FIG. 23). Step S2608 in the music selection process of 39).

[Initial tentative selection song determination process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial temporary selection song determination process (step S2303 in FIG. 24). In the initial temporary selection music determination process, the initial temporary selection music corresponding to the initial temporary selection music image 832 to be displayed first as the temporary selection music image 832 of the music selection image 83 is based on the value acquired from the temporary selection music lottery counter. decide.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
The MPU 51 acquires the value of the initial temporary selection music lottery counter to select the initial temporary selection music (step S2401), and corresponds to the value of the temporary selection music lottery counter acquired in step S2401 with reference to the temporary selection music lottery table. The music to be performed is provisionally determined as the initial temporary selection music (step S2402).

  FIG. 36 shows an example of the temporarily selected music lottery table. As shown in FIG. 36, the temporarily selected music lottery table associates the value of the temporarily selected music lottery counter with the music A to the music T. For example, when the value of the acquired initial temporary selection music lottery counter is “0”, the MPU 51 provisionally determines the music A as the initial temporary selection music, and the acquired initial temporary selection music lottery counter value is “88”. Is temporarily determined as the initial temporary selection music, and when the acquired initial temporary selection music lottery counter value is “155”, the music P is temporarily determined as the initial temporary selection music.

<Steps S2403 and S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music tentatively determined as the initial temporary selection music is an already selected music or a non-selected music (hate music), that is, whether or not it is an unselected music. If the tentatively determined music is an already selected music or a non-selected music (if it is not an unselected music) (step S2403: Yes), the initial temporary selected music is determined without determining the initial temporary selected music. The decision process is terminated. That is, the MPU 51 executes the initial temporary selection song determination process again in the next sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and tries to determine the initial temporary selection song. On the other hand, if the tentatively determined music is not an already selected music or a non-selected music (if it is an unselected music) (step S2403: No), the MPU 51 determines the music temporarily determined in step S2402 as the initial temporary selected music. (Step S2404), and the initial temporary selection music determination process is terminated. For example, whether or not it is a previously selected music or a non-selected music can be determined by referring to the music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) and whether or not the already selected flag or the non-selected flag is set to ON. In the example of FIG. 29, when the music tentatively determined by the lottery in step S2402 is the music A, the music D, or the music J, it is determined that the music is already selected. If it is C or song I, it is determined that it is a non-selected song. Thereby, until songs other than the already selected music (music A, music D, and music J) and non-selected music (music B, music C, and music I) are determined as initial provisionally selected music (step S2403: No). The initial temporary selection music determination process is repeatedly performed.

  By the way, the previously selected music is music that the player has listened to previously by selection by the player, and the non-selected music is music that the player has previously listened to by being output as the initial provisional selection music. It is. When the initial provisionally selected music is determined from the previously selected music or the non-selected music, the music that the player has listened to before is output, so that the opportunity for the player to listen to the unselected music is reduced. Non-selected music is music that was not previously selected by the player, and if such music is output again as the initial provisional selection music, the player may feel disgusted and the jackpot game is sufficient. Can't entertain.

  On the other hand, in step S2403, the initial provisionally selected music is randomly selected until a music other than the previously selected music and the non-selected music is selected. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected music, the player can listen to the unselected music in the process so far, and the player can enjoy the unselected music. It is possible to secure an opportunity to communicate. In addition, the player is bothered by the fact that the music previously selected by the player in step S2404 as the temporarily selected music but not selected by the player is again selected in step S2404 and displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832. You are freed.

  Note that when the player makes a non-display setting to be described later for the selected music image 831 (step S4013 in the music list display setting screen process of FIG. 63 or step S4413 in the music list display setting history screen process of FIG. 71). In the case where the non-display setting flag is set to ON), the music may be selected from the music including the already selected music as the initial temporary selection music. Similarly, when the non-display setting is made by the player for the non-selected music image 834, the initial temporary selected music may be selected from music including non-selected music. That is, the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 may not be selected as the initial temporary selection music only when the images 831 and 834 are displayed as the music selection image 83. .

[Initial tentative selection music output process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial temporary selection music output process (step S2210 in FIG. 23). In the initial temporary selection music output process, the initial temporary selection music corresponding to the initial temporary selection music image 832 is output from the speaker 26 when the temporary selection music image 832 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after shifting to the jackpot game. It is processing. In the initial temporary selection music output process, the initial temporary selection music is normally output from the speaker 26 with a default melody pattern. The melody pattern defines an output start portion when music is output from the speaker 26.

  Here, FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a melody pattern table in which a default setting of a melody pattern is determined for each of a plurality of pieces of music (music A to music T) for each of the temporarily selected music and the selected music. In the example of the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 38, melody pattern 1 and melody pattern 2 are defined as melody patterns. In the melody pattern 1, the basic unit is “A melody (singing portion) → B melody → rust portion”, and the output of the music is started from the A melody (singing portion), and the basic unit is repeatedly output. That is, in the case of melody pattern 1, “A melody (singing part) → B melody → rust part → A melody (singing part) → B melody → rust part → A melody (singing part) →. It becomes. The basic unit of the melody pattern 1 may further include an intro part (prelude part), that is, “intro part (prelude part) → A melody (singing part) → B melody → rust part”. It is done. In this case, the output start of the melody pattern 1 is not an A melody (singing out part) but an intro part. The basic unit of the melody pattern 2 is “rust portion → A melody (singing out portion) → B melody”, and the output of music is started from the rust portion, and the basic unit is repeatedly output in the same manner as the melody pattern 1. In the temporary selection music including the initial temporary selection music, the default setting of the melody pattern is set so that the music A to the music T all start from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus part. In the temporarily selected music, the default setting for all the music A to music T is the melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all of the music may be the melody pattern 1. Further, the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music will be described later in the selected music output process of FIG.

  In this embodiment, the player can set a melody pattern different from the default setting for the output of the temporarily selected music including the initial temporarily selected music as will be described later (the melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61). Or the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69), when the player has set a melody pattern different from the default setting, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player. The

  Furthermore, in the initial provisionally selected music output process, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), the melody pattern is selected at random. Inconsistency may occur with respect to the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music. For example, if the melody pattern is set to default and the output start part of the initial temporary selection music is a rust part, the output of the initial temporary selection music starts when the promotion effect flag is set to on. The part may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Note that selecting a melody pattern randomly is equivalent to performing a contradiction output lottery (step S2804 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41 described later).

  As described above, when an output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) occurs in the output start portion of the initial temporary selection music, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output as the initial temporary selection music. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the previously suggested result. For this reason, the player, for example, when the output contradiction (the melody pattern contradiction) in the output start portion of the initial temporary selection music occurs, for example, the current game state is a 5R probability big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It can be known that either the gaming state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes contradiction in the melody pattern when the initial provisionally selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine cannot make the player interested in the effect in which the initial provisionally selected music is output. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect is executed by the confirmed effect that the melody pattern of the initial temporary selection music is inconsistent. Therefore, the player can check whether the final effect is executed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music, so even if the effect is not interesting to the player in the conventional gaming machine, Since attention can be paid to the effect, the player can enjoy the jackpot game effect. On the other hand, whether or not a melody pattern contradiction occurs is determined by randomly selecting a melody pattern, so that there is a possibility that a promotion effect will be executed even if no melody pattern contradiction occurs. Therefore, even if there is no contradiction in the melody pattern of the initial temporary selection music, the promotion effect may be executed after the temporary selection music is output. Therefore, the player executes the promotion effect after the temporary selection music is output. You can enjoy jackpot games while expecting that.

  The initial provisionally selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2501>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are set to ON in step S2003 in FIG. 19 is set to ON. To do. When the promotion effect flag is set on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2507, and when the promotion effect flag is set off (step S2501: No), the process is stepped. The process moves to S2502.

<Steps S2502 to S2506>
When the promotion effect flag is set to off (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the provisionally selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 in FIG. 61 or S4313 in FIG. 69 is set to on. (Step S2502).

  Here, when the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is off (step S2502: No), that is, when the player has not set the melody pattern, the MPU 51 sets the default melody pattern 2 for the temporarily selected music. (Refer to FIG. 38) is selected (step S2503), the initial temporary selection music is output from the rust portion to the speaker 26 (step S2504), and the initial temporary selection music output processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the temporarily selected melody pattern flag is on (step S2502: Yes), that is, when the player has set a melody pattern, the MPU 51 has a melody pattern 1 ( 38 is selected (step S2505), the initial temporary selection music is output from the A melody (singing part) to the speaker 26 (step S2506), and the initial temporary selection music output processing is terminated.

<Step S2507>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a melody pattern from a plurality of predetermined melody patterns (two in this embodiment) that cause the initial temporary selection music to be output from the speaker 26. Are randomly selected (step S2507). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern (output start portion) is inconsistent when the promotion effect is scheduled, and whether the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music differs from the default setting by the player. Regardless of whether it is set or not, it is determined by random lottery of the melody pattern. Thereby, the MPU 51 can cause a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern of the initial temporary selection music determined in step S2507 is the melody pattern 1. When the melody pattern 1 is selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial temporary selection music from the A melody (singing part) (step S2506), and performs the initial temporary selection music output processing. finish. On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected (step S2508: No), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial temporary selection music from the chorus portion (step S2504), and ends the initial temporary selection music output processing.

  In the initial provisional selection music output process of FIG. 37, a melody pattern is randomly selected (step S2507) on the condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes). Whether to perform output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) in the output start part of the initial temporary selection music of the melody pattern, as in step S2804 in the selected music output process of FIG. 41 described later, instead of selecting a pattern randomly. The lottery may be performed.

[Music selection process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23). In the music selection process, the player selects music to be output in the jackpot game, and when the music is selected by the player, processing such as output of the selected music is executed.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the upper selection button 211 has been operated based on the upper selection button operation data (see FIG. 18B).

  When the upper selection button 211 is operated (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and when the upper selection button 211 is not operated (step S2601: No), the process shifts to step S2603. To do.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 executes a cursor movement display process for moving the cursor image 836 indicating that it is a temporarily selected music piece upward. For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in the initial music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the cursor image 836 and the indicator image 835 (marked with “temporary” characters) are displayed as the music P as shown in FIG. Move to the music A higher by 1. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the previously selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. When the MPU 51 ends the cursor movement display process, the process proceeds to step S2605.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated based on the lower selection button operation data (see FIG. 18C).

  When the lower selection button 212 is operated (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2604, and when the lower selection button 212 is not operated (step S2603: No), the processing shifts to step S2606. To do.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 executes an unselected music image moving display process for moving the unselected music image 833 downward. For example, when the lower selection button 212 is operated in the music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 51 moves the unselected music images 833 for the music E, music F, music G, music H, and music K downward. . At this time, while the unselected music image 833 for the music L is erased, the music selection image 83 for the music T is newly displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832, so that the temporarily selected music is changed from the music P to the music T. Be changed.

  As described above, the player can change the temporarily selected music to the previously selected music by operating the upper selection button 211, and can select the temporarily selected music from the unselected music by operating the lower selection button 212. Therefore, as described above, the player can change the temporarily selected song image 832 in the song selection image 83 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, so that the previously selected song that has been selected before is selected. Even if any of the unselected songs that have not been previously selected is selected, the target song can be temporarily selected with a small number of operations.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 executes a temporarily selected music output process for outputting the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26, and ends the music selection process. Details of the temporarily selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated based on the determination button operation data (see FIG. 18F). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated by determining whether or not the operation on the determination button 21B has been started based on whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON. to decide. When the determination button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2607. When the determination button 21B is not operated (step S2606: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Steps S2607 to S2609>
When the determination button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the determination operation counter (step S2607). Whether or not the determination operation counter is the first music determination in the jackpot game music selection effective period (for example, the period in which the 1R opening / closing execution mode is executed) in step S2802 in the selected music output process of FIG. It is referred to when judging. In addition, the MPU 51 executes a selected music output process for outputting the music selected by the player from the speaker 26 (step S2608), and performs a music selection button effect for executing the music selection button effect in response to the operation on the decision button 21B at the time of selection. Processing is executed (step S2609). Details of the selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the music selection button effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection effective period has elapsed. When the music selection effective period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2611. On the other hand, when the music selection valid period has not elapsed (step S2610: No), the MPU 51 ends the music selection process. In other words, until the music selection valid period has elapsed, the music selection processing flag that is set to ON in step S2306 in the music selection image display process of FIG. 24 is not set to OFF (step S2612). During the period, whether or not there is an operation on the determination button 21B in step S2606 is repeatedly performed. In other words, it is possible to select a plurality of times of music selection (change of selected music) during the music selection effective period. In addition, during the music selection effective period, the selection of the music becomes effective by the operation on the decision button 21B. 8) It is also a period during which the certain change confirmed effect (determined effect 1 to confirmed effect 4) and the reserved villa confirmed effect (determined effect 2 and confirmed effect 4)) can be executed. That is, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the reserved villa confirmation effect is limited within the music selection effective period. In this way, by restricting the execution timing of the music selection button effect, it is possible to prevent the determination button 21B from being operated unnecessarily for checking whether the music selection button effect is executed.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the music selection valid period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 performs music selection counter data update processing for updating data based on music selection by the player in order to display the previously selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. At the same time (step S2611), the music selection processing flag is set to OFF (step S2612), and the music selection processing ends. Details of the music selection counter data update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Tentatively selected music output process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music output process (step S2605 in FIG. 39). In the temporarily selected music output process, when the temporarily selected music is changed by the player's operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, a process of outputting the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26 is executed. In the temporarily selected music output process, the temporarily selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 with a default melody pattern. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when the temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26 as described above (see FIG. 38), and the melody differs from the default setting depending on the player. The pattern can be set (melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 61 or melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69). When a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player.

  Further, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), and the melody pattern is selected at random when the temporarily selected music is an unselected music Thus, a contradiction may occur with respect to the melody pattern. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start part of the temporarily selected music is a rust part, the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the temporarily selected music is an unselected music The output start part of the temporarily selected music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Note that selecting a melody pattern at random is equivalent to performing a contradiction output lottery (step S2803 of a selected music output process in FIG. 41 described later).

  In this way, when there is an output contradiction (a melody pattern conflict) in the output start portion of the tentatively selected music, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output before the tentatively selected music is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the suggested result. Therefore, the player, for example, when the output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) of the output start portion of the temporarily selected music occurs, for example, the current game state is a 5R probable jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It is possible to know that the game state is either the state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes a contradiction in the melody pattern when the temporarily selected music is output. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine has not been able to give the player enough interest in the act of temporarily selecting the music and the production in which the temporarily selected music is output. As a result, the player is temporarily selected Sometimes the music is not changed from the initial provisionally selected music.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect is executed by the confirmed effect that the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music has a contradiction. Therefore, the player performs an act of tentatively selecting a music piece, and at that time, it is possible to confirm whether or not a definite presentation is executed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music piece. It is possible to fully enjoy the act of temporarily selecting music that could not be recorded. In addition, even in the case of an effect that is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by generating discrepancies in the melody pattern on the condition that the temporarily selected music is an unselected music, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of temporarily selecting the music. Unselected music can be tentatively selected. As a result, even if the player finally selects a song from the already selected music, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected music in the process so far. An opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected music can be secured.

  The provisionally selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2701>
In step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are set to ON in step S2003 in FIG. 19 is set to ON. To do.

  Here, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2702, and when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No). The processing moves to step S2703.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether an unselected song has been temporarily selected. When the unselected music is provisionally selected (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2703, and when the unselected music is not temporarily selected (step S2702: No), the process moves to step S2708. To do.

<Steps S2703 to S2707>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 in FIG. 61 and S4313 in FIG. 69 is set to ON.

  Here, when the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is OFF (step S2703: No), that is, when the player has not set the melody pattern, the MPU 51 sets the default melody pattern 2 for the temporarily selected music. (Refer to FIG. 38) is selected (step S2704), the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus portion to the speaker 26 (step S2705), and the initial temporary selected music output process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the provisionally selected music melody pattern setting flag is on (step S2703: Yes), that is, when the player has set a melody pattern, the MPU 51 has a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting (see FIG. 38) (step S2506), the provisional selection music is output from the A melody part (singing part) to the speaker 26 (step S2707), and the initial temporary selection music output process is terminated.

<Step S2708>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: YES) and the temporarily selected music is an unselected music (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 outputs the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26 in advance. A melody pattern is randomly selected from a plurality of melody patterns (two in this embodiment) (step S2708). That is, the MPU 51 temporarily determines whether or not to cause a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) on the condition that the unselected music is temporarily selected when the promotion effect is scheduled. Regardless of whether or not the melody pattern of the selected musical piece is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting, it is determined by random lottery of the melody pattern. Thereby, the MPU 51 can cause a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

  In the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, the melody pattern is randomly selected on the condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON and an unselected music is temporarily selected (step S2701: YES and step S2702: YES). (Step S2708), instead of randomly selecting a melody pattern, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform output contradiction (melody pattern conflict) in the output start portion of the initial temporary selection music of the melody pattern. You may do it. In the present embodiment, when an unselected song is selected, a melody pattern is randomly drawn regardless of whether or not the temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON by the player. When the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the player setting may be prioritized and the temporarily selected music may be output with a melody pattern different from the default setting. That is, when the temporary selection music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the output conflict of the temporary selection music is not generated, and only in the default state where the player setting for the melody pattern is not set. Pattern conflicts may occur. On the other hand, when the temporary selection music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the temporary selection music output contradiction occurs in the non-default state, and the player setting for the melody pattern is not in the default state May not cause inconsistencies in the melody pattern.

  In the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, a melody pattern is randomly selected every time an unselected music is temporarily selected. However, an upper limit may be set for the number of times a melody pattern is randomly selected. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about an upper limit number, For example, it is made into 1 time-about 5 times. Thus, by providing an upper limit for the number of times the melody pattern is selected at random, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly and temporarily selecting unselected music pieces unnecessarily. In addition, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, a contradiction may occur in the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music on condition that the unselected music is temporarily selected. However, if the previously selected music is temporarily selected, the melody A contradiction may be generated in the pattern. For example, the melody pattern may be inconsistent on the condition that the selected music is temporarily selected. In addition, a melody pattern contradiction may be generated when either a previously selected song or an unselected song is temporarily selected. In this way, even if a player who does not know the conditions under which the contradiction occurs in the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music on the gaming machine 10 plays, the contradiction may occur in the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music. As a result, the fun of jackpot games is improved.

[Selected song output processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the selected music output process, a process of outputting the selected music from the speaker 26 when the music is selected by the determination operation on the determination button 21B by the player is executed. In this music output process, the selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 with a default melody pattern. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when the music is output from the speaker 26 as described above. With respect to the selected music, the selected music and the unselected music are individually provided. Default settings are defined. In the already selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that the music A to the music T are all set to start output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (singing part). In the unselected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that the music A to the music T are all set to start the output from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus part. In the selected music, the default setting for all the music A to music T is the melody pattern 1, but the default setting for some or all of the music may be the melody pattern 2. In the unselected music piece, the default setting for all the music pieces A to T is the melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all of the music pieces may be the melody pattern 1.

  Further, the melody pattern of the selected music can be set to a melody pattern different from the default setting by the player for each of the selected music and the non-selected music (the melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61 or FIG. 69 melody pattern setting history screen processing). When the player sets a melody pattern different from the default setting, the selected music piece is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player. For example, when the selected song is a previously selected song, output starts from a melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, and when the selected song is an unselected song, output starts from a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting. .

  Furthermore, in the selected song output process, when the selected song is an unselected song in the first song selection in the song selection valid period (for example, the first round opening / closing execution mode), and the promotion effect flag is set to ON. In addition, when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect, a contradiction regarding the melody pattern can be caused by randomly selecting the melody pattern by performing the contradiction output lottery. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start portion of the selected song is a chorus portion, the promotion effect flag is set on and the selected song is an unselected song. The output start part of the music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Note that performing the contradiction output lottery is equivalent to selecting a melody pattern at random (step S2507 of the initial temporary selection music output process of FIG. 37 and step S2708 of the temporary selection music output process of FIG. 40).

  In this way, when there is an output contradiction in the output start portion of the selected song (melody pattern conflict), the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is suggested before the selected song is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous to the player than the result. Therefore, the player, for example, when the output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) of the output start portion of the selected music occurs, for example, the current game state is a 5R probable jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. And 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, or it can be known that the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player over the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is no one that causes contradiction in the melody pattern when the selected music is output. For this reason, conventional gaming machines are not able to give the player enough interest in the act of selecting music and the production of outputting the selected music, and as a result, the player even selects music. Sometimes not done.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect is executed by the confirmed effect that the contradiction occurs in the melody pattern of the selected music piece. Therefore, the player can confirm whether the definite presentation is executed by performing the act of selecting the music and paying attention to the melody pattern of the selected music at that time. You can fully enjoy the act of selecting music that you couldn't. In addition, even in the case of an effect that is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by generating discrepancies in the melody pattern on the condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of selecting a song, and the player is not selected. It is possible to make provisional selection of music actively. Thereby, the motivation to listen to the unselected music can be given to the player, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

  The selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether the selected song selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is an unselected song. When the selected music is an unselected music (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2802, and when the selected music is not an unselected music, that is, when the selected music is an already selected music (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2810.

<Step S2802>
In step S2802, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first music determination in the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39) added by 1 by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is 1.

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines the first music (step S2802: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2803, and when it is not the first music determination, that is, when the music is determined for the second time or later (step S2802). : No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are set to ON in step S2003 in FIG. 19 is set to ON. . If any promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2804, and if any promotion effect flag is not set to ON (step S2803: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 performs a contradiction output lottery. Contradictory output means that if the melody pattern is set by default, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern different from the default setting, and the melody pattern is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Means to output the selected music from the speaker 26 with the default melody pattern. In the present embodiment, the contradictory output lottery is executed by selecting an unselected song when any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2801 and step S2803: Yes). ). Therefore, when the player selects an unselected song, a contradiction occurs in the output of the song. For example, the current game state is advantageous to the player over the 5R normal jackpot game state, and the game state and 16R It can be known that the game state is one of the probabilistic jackpot gaming state, or the 16R probable jackpot gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting an unselected song can be enjoyed not only as an act of selecting a song but as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Thereby, the player can be motivated to actively select the unselected music and listen to the unselected music, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

  In addition, by performing the contradictory output lottery only for the first music determination (step S2802: Yes), the player selects the unselected music repeatedly and unnecessarily for the purpose of executing the music selection button effect in the jackpot game state. Can be selected. Note that the number of contradictory output lotteries performed in step S2802 is not limited to one per jackpot game, and may be performed twice or more. However, it is preferable to set the upper limit for the number of contradictory output lotteries per jackpot game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessarily repeated selection of unselected songs.

  In step S 2804, the contradictory output lottery is that an unselected song is selected (step S 2801: Yes), the first song determination (step S 2802: Yes), and the first to third promotion effect flags. Is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but the selection of the unselected music and the first music determination is a contradictory output lottery. Conditions can also be excluded. In other words, the contradictory output lottery may be performed with the minimum condition that any one of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON. It has significance as an effect that clearly indicates that the player is in a state advantageous to the player, such as promotion, 16R promotion from 5R probability change jackpot to 16R probability change jackpot, and 16R probability change jackpot from 5R normal jackpot to 16R probability change jackpot. In addition, by selecting the unselected music as a condition for the contradictory output lottery, the player who wants to confirm that the contradictory output is in an advantageous state will select the unselected music. An opportunity to tell the goodness of the unselected music to the can be secured. On the other hand, by selecting the first song determination as a condition for the contradictory output lottery, it is unnecessary to select a song unnecessarily to confirm whether the contradictory output is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected song. Repeating can be suppressed.

<Step S2805>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the contradictory output lottery has been won, and if it has been won (step S2805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2806, and if it has not been won (step S2805: No), The processing moves to step S2809.

<Steps S2806 to S2808>
If the contradictory output lottery is won (step S2805: YES), the MPU 51 in step S2806 has the unselected music melody pattern setting flag set to ON in step S3913 in FIG. 61 or step S4313 in FIG. Determine whether or not. When the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to a melody pattern 1 different from the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38). Then, the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting is selected to execute the contradiction output (step S2807). On the other hand, when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2806: No), that is, when the default melody pattern 2 is set (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes contradictory output. Therefore, melody pattern 1 different from the default setting is selected (step S2808).

<Step S2809>
When the selected music is an unselected music (step S2801: Yes), when it is not the first music determination (when it is the second or subsequent music determination) (step S2802: No), or the first to third promotion effects If none of the flags is set on (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 does not execute the contradictory output lottery (step S2804) in step S2809, and the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set on. Determine whether or not. In step S2809, the MPU 51 also determines whether or not the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON even when the contradictory output lottery is not won (step S2805: No). When the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to a melody pattern 1 different from the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38). Then, the melody pattern 1 is selected for outputting the selected music from the A melody (singing part) without executing the contradictory output (step S2808). On the other hand, when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2809: NO), that is, when the default melody pattern 2 is set (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes contradiction output. Without selection, the default melody pattern 2 to be output from the chorus portion of the selected music is selected (step S2807).

<Step S2810>
When the selected music is not an unselected music (when the selected music is an already selected music) (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 in step S2810 sets the selected music set in step S3913 in FIG. 61 or step S4313 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the melody pattern setting flag is set to ON. The MPU 51 does not perform contradictory output when the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set on (step S2810: Yes), that is, when the melody pattern 2 is different from the default setting, and the selected music is not executed. The melody pattern 2 to be output from the rust portion is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), that is, when the default music melody pattern is set, the MPU 51 does not execute contradictory output and The melody pattern 1 to be output from the A melody (singing part) is selected (step S2808).

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 51 selects the melody pattern of the selected music piece (step S2807 or S2808), the MPU 51 outputs the selected music piece from the speaker 26 with the selected melody pattern (step S2811), and updates the memory of the selected music piece (step S2812). Then, the selected music piece output process is terminated. When the music selection is performed, the music selected at the end of the music selection effective period can be specified even if the music selection is performed multiple times during the music selection effective period by updating the memory of the music selection music. . In addition, since the music selected last in the music selection valid period can be specified, the music ranking of the selected music in the music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) can be updated based on the finally selected music.

  In the selected music output process shown in FIG. 41, the contradictory output lottery is performed when an unselected music is selected. However, the contradictory output lottery may be performed when an already selected music is selected. Also in this case, when the contradictory output lottery is won, for example, the current gaming state is one of the 5R-probable jackpot gaming state and the 16R-probable jackpot gaming state that are more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state, or It can be known that the game state is a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. Even when the contradictory output lottery is performed when the already selected music is selected, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the number of contradictory output lotteries. If it does so, it can suppress that an already selected music is repeatedly selected unnecessarily by the player in the jackpot game state.

[Selection button production process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the song selection button effect process, when the promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed), an unselected song is selected. In this case, the music selection button effect is determined, and the determined music selection button effect is executed. The music selection button effect is an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level that the promotion effect is executed, and a probability change effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed. That is, in the music selection button effect process, when the promotion effect is executed later, the expectation suggestion effect and the probability change confirmation effect are executed according to the music determination operation.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B for determining a music piece, a suggestion effect or a promotion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed is executed. There was no one that performed the probable finalization effect that clearly stated. For this reason, conventional gaming machines are not able to make the player fully interested in the act of selecting music and the effects when the selected music is played, and as a result, the player even selects music. Sometimes not.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is executed at the time of music selection, it is possible to grasp in advance the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed by the music selection button effect. Therefore, the player performs the act of selecting a song, and paying attention to the song selection button effect performed at that time, the act of selecting a song that could not be fully enjoyed with conventional gaming machines I can enjoy it. In addition, even in the case of an effect that is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by generating discrepancies in the melody pattern on the condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of selecting a song, and the player is not selected. It is possible to make provisional selection of music actively. Thereby, the motivation to listen to the unselected music can be given to the player, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

  The music selection button effect process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2901>
In step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether the selected music selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is an unselected music. When the selected music is an unselected music (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2902, and when the selected music is not an unselected music, that is, when the selected music is an already selected music (step S2901: No), the music selection button effect process is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, by determining whether or not untuned music is determined in step S2901, the music selection button effect can be executed on condition that an unselected music is selected. Therefore, a song selection button effect (expectation suggesting effect (suggested effect 1 to suggested effect 8) shown in FIG. 44 to be described later), a certain change confirmed effect (determined effect 1 to confirmed effect 4) and a reserved villa confirmed effect (confirmed effect 2 and confirmed) It is possible to actively select an unselected song for a player who desires to perform the production 4)). This makes it possible for the player to listen to a wide variety of music prepared in advance for output in the special gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the unselected music is selected. However, the music selection button effect may be executed even when the already selected music is selected. . If it does so, operation with respect to the selection determination part 21 for selecting a music can be enjoyed not only as an action for performing a music selection but also as an action for executing a music selection button effect. Thereby, it is possible to make the player actively select a song, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game.

<Step S2902>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first music determination in the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39) added by 1 by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is 1. When the MPU 51 determines the first music (step S2902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2903. Then, the music selection button effect process is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, by determining whether or not it is the first music determination in step S2902, the number of times that the music selection button effect is executed is limited to the first music determination when the unselected music is selected. Is done. Thereby, when performing a music selection button effect, it can suppress that a player repeats a music selection unnecessarily repeatedly, without fully listening to an unselected music in a jackpot game state.

  In addition, the frequency | count of performing a music selection button effect is not limited to once with respect to one jackpot game, You may make it perform twice or more. However, it is preferable to set the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 to 5 times) as the number of times of the music selection button effect for one jackpot game from the viewpoint of suppressing the unselected music from being repeatedly selected unnecessarily.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 in FIG. 19 is set to ON. If the first promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2904, and if the first promotion effect flag is not set (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process moves to step S2805.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 selects a song selection button effect including a suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variation winning effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. 5R probability variation selection button effect determination processing is executed. Details of the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2905>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 in FIG. 19 is set to ON. When the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is set to on (S2905: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2906, and the second promotion effect flag and the third promotion effect flag are turned on. If it is not set (step S2905: No), the music selection button effect process is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

  In the music selection button effect process of FIG. 42, the music selection button effect can be executed on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF for this music selection button effect. You may make it perform to. However, if the promotion effect flag is set to OFF, only the suggestion effect that suggests the expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the probability variation jackpot gaming state is executed as the song selection button effect, and the probability variation jackpot gaming state is executed. There is no possibility that the certainty-change confirmation effect is clearly executed.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 performs a song selection button effect including a suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variation winning effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. The 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process is executed. Details of the 16R probability variation selection button effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<S2907>
When the 5R probability variation selection button effect determination processing or the 16R probability variation selection button effect determination processing is executed (step S2904 or S2906), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set to ON to OFF (step S2907).

<Steps S2908 and S2909>
In step S2908, the MPU 51 determines whether no effect (see FIGS. 45 and 48) has been selected in the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination process. If no effect is selected (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect process without executing the music selection button effect. On the other hand, when no effect is selected (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect selected in the 5R probability variable song button effect determination process or the 16R probability variable song button effect determination process (step S2909). The music selection button effect process ends.

  Here, the music selection button effect process is executed when the music selection process flag is set to ON (steps S2219 in FIG. 23: Yes and S2220). That is, the music selection button effect process is executed for the first music determination operation until the music selection effective period elapses. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the unnecessary selection of the music for confirming whether or not the music selection button effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music.

[5R probable song selection button production decision processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process (step S2904 in FIG. 42). In the 5R probability variable music selection button effect determination process, the music selection button effect (including no effect) to be executed when music selection is performed by the determination operation on the determination button 21B in the music selection effective period is determined. In the following, before explaining the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process, the music selection button effect table shown in FIG. 44 and the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 45 are determined. The 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 44, in the music selection button effect table, suggested effects 1 to 8 and final effects 1 to 4 corresponding to the expected degree (probability change expectation degree) for the probability variation jackpot are defined as the types of the song selection button effects. The suggestion effects 1 to 8 are expectation degree suggestion effects that indicate the expectation degree that the jackpot that has become an opportunity to shift to the jackpot game state is a promising jackpot. On the other hand, the confirmed effects 1 to 4 are effects that clearly indicate that the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probability variation jackpot, and are probability variation confirmed effects that have a probability variation expectation of 100%.

  The suggestion effect 1 is an effect in which the mini character A is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with a probability change expectation of 10%.

  The suggestion effect 2 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to blue by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with a probability change expectation of 10%.

  The suggestion effect 3 is an effect in which the mini character B is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with a probability change expectation of 20%.

  The suggestion effect 4 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to yellow by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with a probability change expectation of 20%.

  The suggestion effect 5 is an effect in which the mini characters A and B are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with an expected probability of change of 30%.

  The suggestion effect 6 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed to red by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with a probability change expectation of 50%.

  The suggestion effect 7 is an effect in which the mini character C is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with an expected probability of change of 66%.

  The suggestion effect 8 is an effect in which the mini characters A, B, and C are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection and the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability change expectation is 80%. Production.

  The confirmed effect 1 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed to a rainbow color by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an opportunity to shift to the jackpot gaming state. This is a 5R probability variation effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot is a 5R probability variation jackpot.

  The confirmed effect 2 is an effect in which the special mini character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is that the 5R probability change jackpot It is a probable change confirmation effect. In addition, the confirmed effect 2 is a big hit (5R certain variation big hit, 16R certain variation big hit or 5R normal big hit) in any of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB. When the jackpot game ends, and when the game state is shifted to the short-time mode, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot that generates a jackpot due to the second hold is executed. It is also a final production.

  In the confirmed effect 3, a special operation sound (for example, a high-pitch operation sound such as “picone”) that is different from the normal operation sound when the determination button 21B is operated at the time of music selection is output by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. This is a 16R probability change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability change jackpot.

  The confirmed effect 4 is an effect in which a special operation sound is output and a special mini character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state Is a probability change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that 16R probability change is a big hit. In addition, the confirmed effect 4 is a big hit (5R certain variation big hit, 16R certain variation big hit or 5R normal big hit) as any of the success / failure information in any of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB. When the jackpot game ends, and when the game state is shifted to the short-time mode, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot that generates a jackpot due to the second hold is executed. It is also a final production.

  Note that the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect corresponds to the probability change finalizing effect, but the music selection button effect setting screen process (FIGS. 66 and 67) described later and the music selection button effect setting history screen process (FIGS. 73 and 74) described later. Is defined separately from the certainty change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table is referred to when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B within the music selection valid period in the 5R probability variable big hit gaming state. The 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables A1 to A8. In each table A1 to A8, the relationship between the music selection button effect lottery counter stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and the effect type is determined, and the music selection button effect can be determined according to the count value of the music selection button effect lottery counter. Has been. In the tables A1 to A4, there is no allocation of the music selection button effect lottery counter for the suggestion effects 1 to 8 indicating the probability change expectation that the jackpot is a probability change jackpot. On the other hand, in the tables A5 to A8, the music selection button effect lottery counter is assigned to the suggestion effects 1 to 8, and any of the suggestion effects 1 to 8 may be determined. In the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table, since it is referred to in the 5R probability variation jackpot game state, the confirmed effect 3 and the confirmed effect 4 that clearly indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot are not defined.

  Specifically, the table A1 is a table in which only “no effect” is determined in which the 5R probability variable selection button effect is not executed even by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A1, none of “suggesting effect 1” to “suggesting effect 8”, “confirmed effect 1”, and “confirmed effect 2” is selected as the music selection button effect.

  The table A2 is a table in which only “no effect” or “definite effect 2” that is a certain change confirmed effect and a reserved villa confirmed effect is determined by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A2, “suggesting effect 1” to “suggesting effect 8” and “final effect 1” are not selected as the music selection button effects.

  The table A3 is a table in which “no effect” or “determined effect 1” which is a certain change confirmed effect is determined by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A3, “suggesting effect 1” to “suggesting effect 8” and “final effect 2” are not selected as the music selection button effects.

  The table A4 is a table in which “no effect”, “confirmed effect 1”, or “confirmed effect 2” is determined by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A4, “suggesting effect 1” to “suggesting effect 8” are not selected as the music selection button effects.

  The table A5 is a table in which “no effect” or “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” is determined by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A5, “definite effect 1” and “determined effect 2” are not selected as the song selection button effects.

  The table A6 is a table in which “no effect”, “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8”, or “definite effect 2” is determined by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A6, “definite effect 1” is not selected as the music selection button effect.

  The table A7 is a table in which “no effect”, “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8”, or “definite effect 1” is determined by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A7, “definite effect 2” is not selected as the music selection button effect.

  The table A8 is a table in which “no effect”, “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8”, “settled effect 1”, or “settled effect 2” is determined by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. . In other words, in the table A8, any of “suggesting effect 1” to “suggesting effect 8”, “confirmed effect 1”, and “confirmed effect 2” can be selected as the music selection button effect.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the conditions for selecting the tables A1 to A8, and is referred to in the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination processing shown in FIG. The 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game settings and the reserved game flag and the tables A1 to A8. The game setting is a setting by the player for whether or not to execute each of an expectation suggestion effect, a probability change confirmation effect, and a reserved villa confirmation effect. If the player has set not to execute the expectation suggestion effect, the expectation degree is set in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process in FIG. 66 or in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process in FIG. The suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. Similarly, according to the setting by the player, in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process in FIG. 66 or in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process in FIG. The confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the reserved consecutive resort flag indicates that the reserved consecutive resort is executed, and is set to ON in step S2205 of FIG.

  In the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, in the table A1 in which only “no effect” is determined, the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is ON as the game setting, and the probability change determination effect non-execution setting flag is ON. When the pending renzi confirmed stage non-execution setting flag is on and the on-hold renja flag is on, or the expectation suggestion stage non-execution setting flag is on, the probability change definite stage non-execution setting flag is on, and the pending renja flag is on Selected when off. The tables A2 to A8 are selected when the game setting flag and the reserved resort flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG. 46, similarly to the table A1.

<Step S3001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process, in step S3001, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag set to ON in step S4113 in FIG. 66 or step S4513 in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is set. That is, the MPU 51 does not execute the expectation suggesting effect that suggests the expectation that the gaming state is the 5R probability variation big hit gaming state or the 16R probability variation big hit gaming state even if the determination button 21B is operated at the time of music selection. It is determined whether or not the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set. When the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002, and the expectation level When the suggestion effect non-execution is set to off (when the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), the process proceeds to step S3012.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag set to ON in step S4113 in FIG. 66 or step S4513 in FIG. 73 is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 51 is a setting that does not execute a certain change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the 5R probability change big hit game state or the 16R probability change big hit game state even if the determination button 21B is operated at the time of music selection. It is determined whether or not the performance non-execution setting has been made. When the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3003, and the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution flag is set. When the execution setting flag is set to OFF (when the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved resort flag indicating that the reserved resort set to be turned on in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is set to on. The MPU 51 moves the process to step S3004 when the pending extended villa flag is set on (step S3003: Yes), and when the pending extended villa flag is set off (step S3003: No). Goes to step S3005.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, when the reserved resort flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 51 does not execute the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the setting flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect non-execution setting, which is a setting that does not execute the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive resort is performed, is performed. MPU51 will transfer a process to step S3005, when the pending | holding consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the reserved consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes), When the hold consecutive villa confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (when the hold consecutive villa confirmed effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3004: No), the process proceeds to step S3007.

<Steps S3005 and S3006>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A1 (see FIG. 45) for selecting “no effect” regardless of which button lottery random number counter value is selected. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probability change). (The determined effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3002: Yes), the reserved villa flag is set on (step S3003: Yes), and the reserved villa determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to on ( Table A1 is selected as a 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (when the reserved consecutive resort finalization non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes) (see FIG. 46). In step S3005, the MPU 51 sets the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON. Even if it is set (probability change effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes) and the reserved consecutive flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the table A1 as a 5R probability change song selection button effect lottery table Is selected (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed in the table A1 (step S3005), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A2 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “fixed effect 2” which is the 5R probability change confirmed effect and the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect is present. To do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probability change). (The determined effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3002: Yes), the reserved consecutive resort flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and the reserved consecutive resort determined effect non-executed setting flag is set to OFF ( Table A2 is selected as a 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery in the table A2 is performed (step S3007), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved resort flag indicating that the reserved resort set to ON in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is to be executed is set to ON. The MPU 51 moves the process to step S3009 when the pending extended villa flag is set on (step S3008: Yes), and when the pending extended villa flag is set off (step S3008: No). Goes to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting flag set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73 is set to ON. When the reserved consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3010, and the reserved consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If it is present (step S3009: No), the process proceeds to step S3011.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A3 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “determined effect 1” that is the 5R certain change confirmed effect is present. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability change). (No determined execution non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: No), the on-hold extended villa flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), and the on-hold extended villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. In this case (when the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3009: Yes), the table A3 is selected as the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In step S3010, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and turns off the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Even if it is set (the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3002: No), and the reserved consecutive flag is set to off (step S3008: No), the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table As shown in FIG. 46, the table A3 is selected. If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table A3 (step S3010), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3011>
In step S3011, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A4 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “the finalized effect 1” and “the finalized effect 2” exists. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability change). (No determined execution non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: No), the on-hold extended villa flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), and the on-hold extended villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. In this case (when the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3009: No), the table A4 is selected as the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table A4 (step S3011), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3012>
When the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (step S3001: No), in step S3012, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. When the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set on (step S3012: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3013, and when the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set off (step). S3012: No), the process proceeds to step S3017.

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved resort flag is set to ON. The MPU 51 moves the process to step S3014 when the pending extended villa flag is set on (step S3013: Yes), and when the pending extended villa flag is set off (step S3013: No). Goes to step S3015.

<Step S3014>
In step S <b> 3014, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. MPU51 will transfer a process to step S3015, and the hold | maintenance extended villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF, when the hold continuous villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3014: Yes). If yes (step S3014: No), the process proceeds to step S3016.

<Step S3015>
In step S3015, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A5 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” exists. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to on. (Probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3012: Yes), the reserved villa flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and the reserved villa determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. In this case (when the reserved consecutive game finalizing effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3014: Yes), the table A5 is selected as the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in step S3015, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3012: Yes), and the 5R probability change song selection button effect lottery table is also set when the reserved consecutive flag is set to OFF (step S3013: No). As shown in FIG. 46, the table A5 is selected. If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table A5 (step S3015), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A6 (see FIG. 45) in which the values of the button lottery random number counters for selecting the “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” and “confirmed effect 2” exist. To do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to on. (Probability confirmed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3012: Yes), the reserved villa flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and the reserved villa determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. (If not set to execute the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect) (step S3014: No), the table A6 is selected as the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed in the table A6 (step S3016), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3017>
When both the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag and the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag are set to OFF (No in steps S3001 and S3012), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending extended resort flag is set to ON. Is determined (step S3017). The MPU 51 moves the process to step S3018 when the pending extended villa flag is set on (step S3017: Yes), and processes when the pending extended villa flag is set off (step S3017: No). The process proceeds to step S3019.

<Step S3018>
In step S3018, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved consecutive resort fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. MPU51 will transfer a process to step S3019, and the hold | maintained consecutive villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF, when the hold continuous villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3018: Yes). If yes (step S3018: No), the process proceeds to step S3020.

<Step S3019>
In step S3019, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A7 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” and “confirmed effect 1” exists. To do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. (The probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), the reserved villa flag is set to ON (step S3017: Yes), and the reserved villa determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. If it has been set (when the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting has been made) (step S3018: Yes), the table A7 is selected as the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in step S3019, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), and the 5R probability change song selection button is also set when the reserved consecutive flag is set to OFF (step S3017: No). Table A7 is selected as an effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table A7 (step S3019), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3020>
In step S3020, the MPU 51 is a table A8 (see FIG. 45) in which there is a value of a button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggesting effect 1” to “suggesting effect 8”, “confirmed effect 1”, and “confirmed effect 2”. A music selection button production lottery is executed. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. (The probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting has not been set) (step S3012: No), the reserved villa flag is set to ON (step S3017: Yes), and the reserved villa determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If it has been set (when the suspended consecutive resort finalized effect non-execution setting has not been set) (step S3018: No), the table A8 is selected as the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table A8 (step S3020), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

[16R probable song selection button production decision processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination process (step S2906 in FIG. 42). In the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 48, the music selection button effect (B) executed when the determination button 21B is operated based on the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table for determining the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. Including no directing). Note that the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination process is basically the same as the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process described above. In the 5R probability variable selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. Each of “A8” may be read as “table B1” to “table B8”.

  Further, the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B within the music selection effective period in the 16R probability variation big hit gaming state. The 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables B1 to B8. The 16R probable selection button effect lottery table is basically the same as the 5R probable selection button effect lottery table, but instead of “determined effect 1” in the 5R probable song selection button effect lottery table, “definite effect 3” is defined. Thus, “determined effect 4” is defined instead of “determined effect 2”. That is, in the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table, since it is referred to in the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, the confirmed effect 1 and the confirmed effect 3 that clearly indicate that the 5R probability variation jackpot is not defined. A detailed description of the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table is omitted.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table defines conditions for selecting the tables B1 to B8, and is referred to in the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination processing shown in FIG. The 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game settings and the reserved game flag and the tables B1 to B8. The game setting and the reserved consecutive flag are synonymous with the case of the 5R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table. In the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, in the table B1 (see FIG. 48) in which only “no effect” is determined, the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is ON as the game setting, and the probability change final effect non-execution is performed. If the setting flag is on, the reserved villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is on, and the reserved villa flag is on, or the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is on, the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is on, and This is selected when the reserved villa flag is off. The tables B2 to B8 are selected when the game setting flag and the reserved resort flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG. 49, similarly to the table B1.

<Steps S3101 to S3107>
Returning to the description of FIG. 47, in the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination process, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability change. The confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3102: Yes), the reserved extended resort flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), and the reserved extended resort fixed effect is not set. When the execution setting flag is set to ON (when the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3104: Yes), any button lottery random number counter is used as the 16R probability variable song button effect lottery table. The table B1 (step S3105) (see FIG. 48) for selecting “no effect” even if the value of is selected is selected (FIG. 4). Reference). Further, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and sets the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probability change). (The determined effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3102: Yes), and even when the reserved consecutive flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the table B1 is selected as the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table ( Step S3105) (see FIG. 49). If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table B1 (step S3105), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3107, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and turns on the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Is set (probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3102: Yes), the reserved villa flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), and the reserved villa determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If it is determined that there is no non-execution setting for the reserved consecutive villa finalization (step S3104: No), the 16R positive variable selection button directing lottery table as the 16R positive variable selection directing effect and the fixed consecutive villa finalization effect “definite production” The table B2 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “4” exists is selected (see FIG. 49). If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table B2 (step S3107), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3108 to 3111>
In step S3110, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. It is set (the probability variation finalized effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3102: No), the reserved extended villa flag is set on (step S3108: Yes), and the reserved extended villa determined effect non-executed setting flag is turned on. If it has been set (pending consecutive villa finalization non-execution setting is made) (step S3109: Yes), “16R finalization 3”, which is the 16R positive variation finalization effect, is selected as the 16R positive variation selection button production lottery table. The table B3 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter to be selected exists is selected (see FIG. 49). In step S3110, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Even if it is set (the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting has not been set) (step S3102: No) and the reserved range flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table Table B3 is selected (see FIG. 49). When the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table B3 (step S3110), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3111, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. It is set (the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting has not been set) (step S3102: No), the reserved extended villa flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the reserved extended villa fixed effect non-executed setting flag is turned off. If it is set (if the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3109: No), “Finalizing effect 3” and “Finalized effect 4” are used as the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table. The table B4 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter to be selected exists is selected (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B4 (step S3111), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3112 to S3116>
In step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is ON. (Probability confirmed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3112: Yes), the reserved villa flag is set on (step S3113: Yes), and the reserved villa final effect non-execution setting flag is set on. (If the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3114: Yes), "Suggesting effect 1" to "Suggesting effect 8" are selected as the 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table. Table B5 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). In step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (no expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: No), and the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3112: Yes), and the 16R probability change song selection button effect lottery table is also set when the reserved consecutive flag is set to OFF (step S3113: No). Table B5 is selected (see FIG. 49). If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table B5 (step S3115), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3116, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (no expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: No), and the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting has been set) (step S3112: Yes), the reserved consecutive resort flag is set to ON (step S3113: Yes), and the reserved consecutive resort determined effect non-executed setting flag is set. When it is set to OFF (when the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3114: No), as the 16R probability variable selection button effect lottery table, “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” ”And“ Confirmed effect 4 ”are selected. The table B6 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table B6 (step S3116), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3117 to S3120>
In step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is off. (The probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3112: No), the reserved villa flag is set to ON (step S3117: Yes), and the reserved villa determined effect non-execution setting flag is ON. Is set to (reserved consecutive villa confirmed effect non-execution setting) (step S3118: Yes), as the 16R probability variable song button effect lottery table, "suggest effect 1" to "suggest effect 8" and "definite effect The table B7 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “3” is selected is selected (see FIG. 49). In step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability change definite effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting has not been set) (step S3112: No), and the 16R probability change song selection button is also set when the reserved consecutive flag is set to OFF (step S3117: No). Table B7 is selected as an effect lottery table (see FIG. 49). If the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table B7 (step S3119), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3120, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting has not been set) (step S3101: No), and the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting has not been set) (step S3112: No), the reserved extended resort flag is set to ON (step S3117: Yes), and the reserved extended resort fixed effect non-executed setting flag is set. Is set to OFF (when the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3118: No), as the 16R probability variable song selection button effect lottery table, “suggested effect 1” to “suggested effect” 8 ”,“ Confirmed Effect 3 ”and“ Confirmed Effect 4 ”are selected. The table B8 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). . When the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table B8 (step S3120), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variable music selection button effect determination process.

[Music selection counter data update processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update process (step S2611 in the music selection process of FIG. 39). In the music selection counter data update processing, it is necessary for the music selection image display processing (see FIG. 24) and the initial provisional selection music determination processing (FIG. 35) according to the music selection status by the player during the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. The music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) is updated. As a result, it is possible to create an already selected song list (see FIG. 30A) and an unselected song list (see FIG. 30B) necessary for displaying the song selection image 83 (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is possible to create initial arrangement order data (see FIG. 31). As a result, by updating the music selection counter data in the music selection counter data update process, the music selection status by the player in the current jackpot game is reflected in the music selection image 83 displayed in the next jackpot game, The music selection image 83 has high operability for music selection for the player.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is storage of an initial temporary selection music that can be temporarily stored in the RAM 512 in step S2304 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. In step S3201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102. If no initial provisionally selected music is stored (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3106.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music determined by the MPU as the initial temporary selection music (step S2404 in FIG. 35) has been selected as the selection music by the player, and the initial temporary selection music is the selection music. If it is (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3106. If the initial temporary selection music is not selected (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3103.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (A1) and FIG. 51 (A2), in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. If the music F is not selected by the user, the music F is stored in the first position of the non-selected music list rank, and the second and third positions in the non-selected music list rank are the unselected music lists before the update, respectively. A song I with song number 9 that is ranked first and a song B with song number 2 that is ranked second are stored. In addition, among the non-selected music whose rank of the non-selected music list is 3rd before the update, the music C of the music number 3 with the oldest non-selected date / time is set to 0th and is changed to an unselected music.

  In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the non-selection flag. For example, when the non-selected song list rank is updated from FIG. 51 (A1) to FIG. 51 (A2), the non-selected flag is updated for the song C whose non-selected song list rank has been changed from third to zero. This is done by setting the selection flag to OFF and setting the non-selection flag of music F whose non-selected music list rank has been changed from 0th to 1st to ON. When the data related to the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) is updated (step S3203), the initial provisionally selected music stored in the RAM 512 is cleared (step S3204).

<Step S3205>
In step S3205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a storage of selected music that can be stored in the RAM 512 in step S2812 in the selected music output process of FIG. 41. The process proceeds to step S3106, and if the selected music piece is not stored (step S3205: No), the music piece selection counter data update process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
In step S3206, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) relating to the already selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (B1) and FIG. 51 (B2), when the player selects song E with song number 5 as the selected song in the song selection counter data table shown in FIG. 1 is added to the selection counter of the music E. Also, the music E is stored in the first place of the selected music list order, and the music number 1 that has been the first place in the selected music list order before the update is placed in the second and third places of the selected music list order, respectively. The music A and the music D of the music number 4 which was the second place are stored. In addition, the song D with the song number 4 having the oldest selection date among the selected songs whose rank of the selected song list was third before the update is set to the zeroth and changed to an unselected song.

  In step S3205, the MPU 51 updates the already selected flag. For example, when the non-selected music rank is updated from FIG. 51 (B1) to FIG. 51 (B2), the selected flag is updated when the selected music list rank is changed from third to zero. This is done by setting the flag to OFF and turning ON the selected flag of the song E whose rank of the selected song list has been changed from 0th to 1st. When the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) relating to the already selected music in the music selection counter data table (step S3206), the MPU 51 clears the storage of the selected music stored in the RAM 512 (step S3207), and the music selection counter The data update process is terminated.

  In addition, when the music is selected from the non-selected music, the music is changed from the non-selected music to the already selected music. For example, in the case where the music B having the second non-selected music rank is selected in FIG. On the other hand, in the non-selected music rank data, the music B is deleted from the 2nd place, the 3rd place music C is moved up to the 2nd place, and the 3rd place is updated with no corresponding music. In addition, the non-selection flag of the music B is set off, and the already-selected flag of the music B is set on. That is, by selecting a song from an unselected song, information on non-selection for the song is cleared from the song selection counter data, while information indicating that the song is an already selected song is included. Addition is performed.

  In addition, when the selected music list order is determined based on the selection frequency instead of the newest date and time, the data related to the selected music is updated based on the selection frequency counter of the music E. For example, in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29, when the music piece No. 5 is selected as the selection music piece by the player, the selection number counter is updated from 0 to 1 for the music piece E. There is no change in the selected song list order. Therefore, the MPU 51 does not change the selected music list order and the selected flag. In addition, when the order of the selected songs is determined according to the selection frequency, if there is a change in the order of the selected songs, the selected songs according to the same procedure as that for updating the data on the selected songs in the order of the selected date and time. The list order and the already selected flag are updated.

[Game setting process]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15). In the game setting process, in the period when the game turn effect or the jackpot game effect is not executed, the jackpot is determined according to the player's operation on the selection decision unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B). Game setting for the game effect is executed.

  By the way, as a conventional game, a player can perform game settings related to various effects executed using the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the like, such as selection of characters appearing in a game turn effect or a jackpot game effect. is there. In such a gaming machine, the player can customize the performance according to his / her preference by making game settings related to various performances by selecting his / her favorite character, etc. You can enjoy the game production even more.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a novel feature as a jackpot gaming effect with respect to the conventional gaming machine as described above. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays an image including the previously selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 as the music selection image 83 in the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game effect (see FIG. 25). ). In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that, in the jackpot game, before the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the currently suggested gaming state, When the provisional selection music including the music or the selection music is output from the speaker 26, it is clearly indicated that the promotion effect is executed by generating a contradiction in the melody pattern of the music, and the determination operation on the determination button 21B when selecting the music The music selection button effect that suggests or clearly indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed is executed.

  Then, in the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, a process is executed in the case where the player sets a game for a jackpot game effect having a new feature with respect to a conventional gaming machine. Specifically, in the game setting process, the music list display setting relating to the display or non-display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the music selection image display screen 82 in accordance with an operation on the selection determination unit 21 by the player. Then, the temporary selection music and the melody pattern setting for the selected music and the music selection button effect setting for setting execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect are executed. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can perform music list display setting, melody pattern setting, and music selection button effect setting, which are not conventional game setting items, as the game setting of the jackpot game effect.

  Here, in the music list display setting, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 72, each of the already selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (hate music) image 834 in the music selection image 83. Can be set to show or hide. Thereby, the player can customize the music selection image 83 in a favorite display mode. In addition, for example, by setting the display mode to a desired display by setting information related to past music selection that is determined to be unnecessary by the player to a non-display setting, the player performs temporary selection and selection of music without stress. be able to.

  In the melody pattern setting, as described later with reference to FIGS. 62 and 70, etc., a melody pattern of temporarily selected music and selected music (unselected music and selected music) can be set. Thereby, the player can not only output the temporarily selected music and the selected music with the default setting, but also can output the music from a portion other than the default setting. As a result, the selection range of the tentatively selected tune and the output start portion of the selected tune is widened, and the player can output the tentatively selected tune and the selected tune at his / her own discretion. You can enjoy music and selected music.

  Furthermore, in the music selection button effect setting, it can be set whether or not the music selection button effect is executed as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 74. Thereby, when the player has set to execute the music selection button effect, there is a possibility that the promotion effect will be executed by the operation of the music selection button effect (the operation on the decision button 21B in music selection). Can be enjoyed as an act to know. On the other hand, if the player does not execute the song selection button effect, the player cannot know in advance whether or not the promotion effect will be executed. Can maintain a sense of expectation that will be executed. Therefore, by selecting whether or not to execute the song selection button effect setting, it is possible to enjoy the game in accordance with the player's preference as to whether or not the promotion effect is performed.

  The game setting process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. However, before explaining the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, a display screen transition example in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, even if a predetermined time elapses after the stop display of the main symbol 921, it does not shift to a later-described top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53B), a demonstration screen, and a power saving screen. A description will be made assuming that a change stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A) described later is maintained, and that a game can be set after a predetermined time elapses after the change stop screen 92 is displayed. Of course, the game setting may be made possible immediately after the change stop screen 92 is displayed. When a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop screen 92 is displayed, the game setting is automatically performed regardless of the player's operation. Specifically, the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53B) may be shifted to.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (A), when the change display of the main symbol 921 is stopped, the main symbol 921 is displayed when the number of holds N and the number of holds M are “0” and the game does not shift to the jackpot gaming state. The change stop screen 92 in a state where the change of the change is stopped is maintained. When the operation button 20 is operated by the player after the lapse of a predetermined time after the change stop screen 92 is displayed, the display screen is changed from the change stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. Transition. The top menu screen 93 includes a plurality of selection images 931 to 935, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937.

  The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 on the top menu screen 93 are images for indicating a plurality of selectable items and for causing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. In addition, the plurality of selection images 931 to 935 are also images for selecting a display screen as a migration destination. The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 include a “game setting customization” selection image 933 for performing game setting at the time of a big hit game, a “end” selection image 935 for shifting from the top menu screen 93 to the change stop screen 92, and the like. including.

  A cursor image 936 on the top menu screen 93 is an image showing an item that is currently temporarily selected. In addition, the selection image 933 (the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” in FIG. 53 (B)) that has been temporarily selected is another selection image 931, 932 in order to emphasize that it has been temporarily selected. 934 and 935 are displayed in a distinguishable manner. This is the same as the provisionally selected music image 832 (see FIG. 25) in the music selection image 83 described above.

  The selection determination unit image 937 on the top menu screen 93 is an image that simulates the selection determination unit 21 (see FIG. 1), and indicates that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by an operation on the selection determination unit 21. It is an image. In the selection determination part image 937, the characters “select” are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are emphasized. Is displayed. Further, the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. Further, in the selection determination part image 937, the character “decision” is attached to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, which indicates that the operation should be performed when selecting the temporarily selected item. The display example of the selection determination unit image 937 is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 53B and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the top menu screen 93, when any item (selected images 931 to 935) is selected from a plurality of items by operating the decision button 21 </ b> B, the display screen according to the selected item is displayed. Transition. For example, when the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” is selected by the player, the game setting screen 94 shown in FIG. The game setting screen 94 includes a plurality of selection images 941 to 945, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937. Note that the cursor image 936 and the selection determination unit image 937 are the same as those in the case of the top menu screen 93, and thus description thereof is omitted. In the following, in the case where the cursor image 936 and the selection determination unit image 937 on the top menu screen 93 are the same as those of the top menu screen 93, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 on the game setting screen 94 show a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the transfer destination) and allow the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. It is an image. The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 include a selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting”, a selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting”, a selection image 945 of “return to top menu”, and the like.

  Here, FIG. 54 (A) shows an example of the game setting screen 94 as in FIG. 53 (C), and FIG. 54 (B), FIG. 54 (C) and FIG. It is an example of the display screen which transfers from the game setting screen. Specifically, FIG. 54B is an example of the setting item selection screen 95, FIG. 54C is an example of the setting history selection screen 96, and FIG. 54D is the same as FIG. 53B. 7 is an example of the top menu screen 93. That is, in the game setting screen shown in FIG. 54A, when the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting item selection screen 95, and “setting” When the selection image 944 of “history song selection setting” is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 54C, and the selection image 965 of “return to top menu” is displayed. When selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the above-described top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 54 (D). Hereinafter, the setting item selection screen 95 will be described with reference to FIG. 55, and the setting history selection screen 96 will be described with reference to FIG.

  A setting item selection screen 95 shown in FIG. 55 is a screen that enables individual selection of items related to music selection in the jackpot game. The setting item selection screen 95 includes a plurality of selection images 951 to 955. The “melody pattern” selection image 951 is an image to be selected when setting a melody pattern among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 951 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97. The “music list display” selection image 952 is an image that is selected when the music list display setting is selected among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 952 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98. The selection image 953 of “music selection button effect” is an image to be selected when the music selection button effect setting is performed among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 953 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99. The selection image 954 “return one” is an image that is selected when the display screen is returned by one. When the selection image 954 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54A) which is a display screen before shifting to the setting item selection screen 95. A selection image 955 of “return to top menu” is an image selected when the display screen is returned to the top menu screen 93. When the selection image 955 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D).

  The setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 56 is a screen that displays the setting history of items related to music selection in a winning game, and enables individual selection of items related to music selection in a jackpot game. The setting history selection screen 96 includes a plurality of selection images 961 to 965. The selection image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” is an image selected when melody pattern setting is performed based on the melody pattern setting history. When the selection image 961 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the melody pattern setting history screen 87. The selection image 962 of “music list display setting history” is an image selected when the music list display setting is performed based on the setting history of the music list display. When the selection image 962 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen 88. The selection image 963 of “music selection button effect setting history” is an image that is selected when the music selection button effect setting is performed based on the music selection button effect setting history. When the selection image 963 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. The selection image 964 of “return one” is an image that is selected when the display screen is returned by one. When the selection image 964 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 (FIG. 54A), which is a display screen before shifting to the setting history selection screen 96. The selection image 965 of “return to the top menu” is an image selected when the display screen is returned to the top menu screen 93. When the selection image 965 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D).

<Step S3401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 52, in step S3401 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the change stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter update process (step S1707) in FIG. 15 is 0, and the variable stop in the top menu screen process in FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 based on whether or not the variable stop screen display flag set to ON in the screen transition process is ON.

  When the display screen is the variation stop screen 92 (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3402, and when the display screen is not the variation stop screen 92 (step S3401: NO), the process proceeds to step S3403. To do.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 executes a game start standby process and ends the game setting process. Details of the game start standby process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). Specifically, the MPU 51 has a top menu screen display flag that is set to ON in a top menu screen transition process such as step S3504 of a game start standby process of FIG. 57 described later and step S3711 of a game setting screen process of FIG. 59 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 is determined based on whether or not it is on. If the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3404. If the display screen is not the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: NO), the processing proceeds to step S3405.

<Step S3404>
In step S3404, the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is a game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54A). Specifically, the MPU 51 turns on the game setting screen display flag that is set to ON in the game setting screen transition processing such as step S3609 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. 58 described later and step S3813 of the setting item selection processing in FIG. Whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 is determined based on whether or not it is. When the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3406. When the display screen is not the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: No), the process proceeds to step S3407. To do.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen process and ends the game setting process. Details of the game setting screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55). Specifically, the MPU 51 displays the setting item selection screen display that is set to ON in the setting item selection screen transition processing such as step S3707 in the game setting processing of FIG. 59 to be described later, step S3907 of the melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. Whether or not the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 is determined based on whether or not the flag is on. When the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3408. When the display screen is not the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: No), the processing proceeds to step S3409. Migrate to

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 51 executes a setting item selection process and ends the game setting process. Details of the setting item selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting screen display flag set to ON in the melody pattern setting screen transition processing in step S3807 in the setting item selection processing of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is a melody pattern setting screen 97. When the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3410, and when the display screen is not the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: No), the processing is step S3411. Migrate to

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 executes a melody pattern setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The melody pattern setting screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3411>
In step S3411, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A). Specifically, the MPU 51 is based on whether or not the music list display setting screen display flag set to ON in the music list display setting screen transition processing in step S3809 in the setting item selection processing of FIG. Whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 is determined. When the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3412. When the display screen is not the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process moves to step S3413.

<Step S3412>
In step S3412, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. Details of the music list display setting screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67). Specifically, the MPU 51 is based on whether or not the music selection button effect setting screen display flag set to ON in the music selection button effect setting screen transition process of step S3811 in the setting item selection process of FIG. Whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is determined. When the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3414, and when the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect setting screen process and ends the game setting process. Details of the music selection button effect setting screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54C and 56). Specifically, the MPU 51 performs step S4307 in the melody pattern setting history screen process of FIG. 69 described later, step S4407 in the music list display setting history screen process of FIG. 71 described later, and music selection button effect setting history of FIG. 73 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 is determined based on whether or not the setting history selection screen display flag set to ON in the setting history selection screen transition processing in step S4507 in the screen processing is ON. to decide. When the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3416. When the display screen is not the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: No), the processing proceeds to step S3417. Migrate to

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 51 executes a setting history selection process and ends the game setting process. Details of the setting history selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70). Specifically, the MPU 51 is based on whether or not the melody pattern setting history screen display flag set to ON in the melody pattern setting history screen transition processing of step S4207 in the setting history selection processing of FIG. Whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 is determined. When the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3418, and when the display screen is not the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: No), the processing is performed. The process moves to step S3419.

<Step S3418>
In step S3418, the MPU 51 executes a melody pattern setting history screen process and ends the game setting process. Details of the melody pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3419>
In step S3419, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting history screen display flag set to ON in the music list display history screen transition processing in step S4209 in the setting history selection processing of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88. When the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3420, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: No). The processing moves to step S3421.

<Step S3420>
In step S3420, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting history screen process, and ends the game setting process. Details of the music list display setting history screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3421>
In step S3421, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag set to ON in the music selection button effect history screen transition process of step S4211 in the setting history selection process of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. When the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3422, and when the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: No). The processing moves to step S3423.

<Step S3422>
In step S3422, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect history screen process and ends the game setting process. Details of the music selection button effect history screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3423>
In step S3423, the MPU 51 displays the change stop screen 92, the top menu screen 93, the game setting screen 94, the setting item selection screen 95, the setting history selection screen 96, the melody pattern setting screen 97, the music list display setting screen 98, the music selection. If none of the button effect setting screen 99, the melody pattern setting history screen 87, the music list display setting history screen 88, and the music selection button effect setting history screen 89, other processing corresponding to the current display screen is executed, and the game setting is performed. The process ends.

[Game start standby processing]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process (step S3402 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the game start standby process, the display screen is changed from the change stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation button 20. ) Is executed.

<Step S3501>
In step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol has started to change based on whether or not the value of the change display counter is zero. The MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started when the value of the fluctuation display counter is not zero.

  When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has been started (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game start standby process and determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not been started (step S3501: No). ), The process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18A). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503. When the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S3502: No), the game starts. The standby process is terminated.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 92. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed (when the value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the time counter, and refers to the value of this time counter to change the fluctuation stop screen 92. It is possible to grasp the time from when is displayed.

  When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S3503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3504. When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3503: No), the game start standby process is performed. Exit.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3502: Yes and step S3503: Yes), the player operates the operation button 20 Accordingly, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process (step S3404 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the top menu screen processing, items selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 from the plurality of selection images 941 to 945 displayed on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D) are displayed. A process for shifting the display screen to the corresponding screen is executed.

<Step S3601>
In step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3602, and when it is determined that the variation of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S3601: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3602>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3601: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to OFF (step S3602), and the top menu screen processing is ended.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3604. When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: No), processing is performed. Goes to step S3605.

<Step S3604>
When it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the temporary selection display change process on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). Is executed (step S3604). For example, the MPU 51 selects the cursor image 936 when the upper selection button 211 is operated in a state where the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” shown in FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D) is temporarily selected. It is moved to the side of the selected image 932 that is one level higher than 933. At this time, the selection image indicating that the temporary selection is displayed is changed from the selection image 933 to the selection image 932. On the other hand, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 936 to the side of the selection image 934 that is one level lower than the selection image 933 when the lower selection button 212 is operated while the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” is temporarily selected. The selected image indicating the temporary selection display is changed from the selected image 933 to the selected image 934. When the process of step S3604 ends, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen process.

  When the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D), the MPU 51 can display the cursor image 936 or the right image even if the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated. Processing such as moving the temporary selection display of the selected images 941 to 945 is not executed.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F).

  When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3606, and when it is determined that the operation on the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S3605: No). The top menu screen processing is terminated.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “end” selection image 935 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D) on the top menu screen 93 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. To do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “end”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selection image 935 has been selected (step S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3607, and if the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selection image 935 has not been selected (step S3606). S3606: No), the process proceeds to step S3608.

<Step S3607>
When it is determined that the “end” selection image 935 has been selected (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D) to the change stop screen 92 ( Fluctuation stop screen transition processing for transition to FIG. 53 (A)) is executed (step S3607). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF, while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3608>
In step S3608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 933 (see FIG. 53B and FIG. 54D) of “game setting customization” on the top menu screen 93 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. Judging. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “game setting customization”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” is selected (step S3608: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3609, and determines that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” is not selected. If so (step S3608: No), the process proceeds to step S3610.

<Step S3609>
When it is determined that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” has been selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the game setting screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). A game setting screen transition process for transitioning to 94 (see FIGS. 53C and 54A) is executed (step S3609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to ON while setting the top menu screen display flag to OFF, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3610>
In step S3610, if the item selected by the player's operation on the enter button 21B is other than “end” and “game setting customization”, the MPU 51 shifts to a display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player. . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF.

[Game setting screen processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process (step S3406 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the game setting screen process, a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54 (B)), a setting history selection are selected from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54 (A)) in accordance with the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21. Processing for moving the display screen to the screen 96 (see FIG. 54C) or the top menu screen (see FIG. 54D) is executed.

<Step S3701>
In step S3701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3701: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3702, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S3701: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S3703.

<Step S3702>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3701: YES), the game setting screen display flag is set to OFF (step S3702), and the game setting screen processing is ended.

<Step S3703>
In step S3703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3704, and when it is determined that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3703: No). The process proceeds to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
In step S3704, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, as in the temporary selection display change process in step S3604 in the top menu screen process of FIG. Accordingly, a temporary selection display change process for moving the cursor image 936 and the temporary selection display up or down by one on the game setting screen 94 is executed. When the process of step S3704 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3705: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3706, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3705: No). The game setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “normal music selection setting” selection image 943 (see FIG. 54A) on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “normal music selection setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” is selected (step S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3707, and determines that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” is not selected. If so (step S3706: NO), the process proceeds to step S3708.

<Step S3707>
When it is determined that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” has been selected (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 53C and FIG. 54A). A setting item selection screen transition process for transitioning to the selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55) is executed (step S3707). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to ON while setting the game setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “setting history music selection setting” selection image 944 (see FIG. 54A) on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “setting history music selection setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” is selected (step S3708: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3709, and the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” is not selected. (Step S3708: No), the process proceeds to step S3710.

<Step S3709>
When it is determined that the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” has been selected (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53C and 54A). A setting history selection screen transition process for shifting to the history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54C) is executed (step S3709). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF, while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3710>
In step S3710, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 945 “return to top menu” on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 945 “return to the top menu” is selected (step S3710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3711 and determines that the selection image 945 “return to the top menu” is not selected. If so (step S3710: No), the process proceeds to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
When it is determined that the selection image 945 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 53C and FIG. 54A) and the top menu screen. A top menu screen transition process for transitioning to 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D) is executed (step S3711). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the game setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, the MPU 51 is selected by the player when the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than “normal music selection setting”, “setting history music selection setting”, and “return to top menu”. Move to the display screen corresponding to the item. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF.

[Setting item selection processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting item selection process (step S3408 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 55, in the setting item selection process, according to the item selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 from the music selection related items at the time of the big hit game displayed on the setting item selection screen 95, Processing for shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to various setting screens 97 to 99 is executed. In the following, the setting item selection process will be described by taking as an example a case where the music selection-related items are a melody pattern, a music list display (music selection image 83), and a music selection button effect. However, the music selection related items are not limited to the melody pattern, the music list display (music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect. For example, it may be possible to allow the player to set other music selection related items in place of some or all of the melody pattern, music list display (music selection image 83) and music selection button effects. For example, as other music selection related items, initial temporary selection music fixed to fix the initial temporary selection music or the selection music by setting by the player can be considered.

<Step S3801>
In step S3801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S3801: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S3803.

<Step S3802>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF (step S3802), and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3803>
In step S3803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 selects the upper selection button based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). It is determined whether 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3804. When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3803: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S3805.

<Step S3804>
When it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button in the same way as the temporary selection display change processing in step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. The temporary selection display changing process for moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display up or down on the setting item selection screen 95 is executed according to whether the button 211 or the lower selection button 212 is selected (step) S3804). When the process of step S3804 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3806, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3805: No). The game setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “melody pattern setting” selection image 951 (see FIG. 55) on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “melody pattern setting” selection image 951 has been selected (step S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3807 and determines that the “melody pattern setting” selection image 951 has not been selected. If so (step S3806: NO), the process proceeds to step S3808.

<Step S3807>
If it is determined that the selection image 951 of “Melody pattern setting” has been selected (step S3806: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97 as shown in FIG. A melody pattern setting screen transition process is executed (step S3807). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF, while setting the melody pattern setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a selection image 952 (see FIG. 55) of “music list display setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “music list display setting”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 952 of “music list display setting” is selected (step S3808: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3809, and the selection image 952 of “music list display setting” is not selected. (Step S3808: No), the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Step S3809>
When it is determined that the selection image 952 of “music list display setting” is selected (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98 as shown in FIG. The music list display setting screen transfer process to be transferred is executed (step S3809). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF, while setting the music list display setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3810>
In step S3810, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a selection image 953 (see FIG. 55) of “Song selection button effect setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “music selection button effect setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 953 of “music selection button effect setting” is selected (step S3810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3811, and the selection image 953 of “music selection button effect setting” is not selected. (Step S3810: No), the process proceeds to step S3812.

<Step S3811>
If it is determined that the selection image 953 of “music selection button effect setting” has been selected (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 as shown in FIG. The music selection button effect setting screen transfer process to be transferred is executed (step S3811). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF, while setting the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3812>
In step S3812, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a selection image 954 (see FIG. 55) “return to one” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is the “return to one” item. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 954 “return to one” has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3813 and determines that the selection image 954 “return to one” has not been selected. If so (step S3812: NO), the process proceeds to step S3814.

<Step S3813>
When it is determined that the selection image 954 of “return to one” is selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. Step S3813). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to ON while setting the game setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the setting item selection processing.

<Step S3814>
When the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than “melody pattern setting”, “music list display setting”, “music selection button effect setting”, and “return to one”, the “top menu” is displayed. Since it can be determined that “RETURN” has been selected, as shown in FIG. 55, a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S3814). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF and sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Melody pattern setting screen processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen process (step S3410 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting screen process, a process for setting a provisionally selected music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game and a melody pattern (start of music output) of the selected music is executed. FIG. 62 shows an example of a melody pattern setting screen 97. In the following, the melody pattern setting screen 97 will be described first with reference to FIG. 62, and then the melody pattern setting screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern setting screen 97 is a screen for setting a tentatively selected song in the jackpot game, an unselected song as the selected song, and a melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected song. . The melody pattern setting screen 97 includes selected images 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977 in addition to the temporarily selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already selected music setting image 973.

  The temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting a melody pattern of the temporarily selected music. In other words, the temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing portion or the chorus portion when the temporarily selected music is selected by the player. It has a singing start selection image that is set to be performed from the protruding portion, and a rust selection image that is set to start output from the rust portion.

  The unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is an unselected music. That is, the unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing portion or the chorus portion when an unselected music piece is selected by the player. It has a singing start selection image that is set to be performed from the start portion and a rust selection image that is set to start output from the rust portion.

  The selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is an already selected music. That is, the selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting whether to start the output when the player selects the selected music from the singing part or the chorus part, and to start the output. A singing start selection image for setting to be performed from the singing portion and a rust selection image for setting to start output from the rust portion.

  The plurality of selection images 974 to 976 are “return to one” selection images 974, which are selected when the display screen is returned to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55). A selection image 975 of “return to top menu” selected when the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D), and a temporarily selected music, an unselected music, and an already selected music “Omakase” selection image 976 for causing the gaming machine 10 to set the output start of the “Omakase”. In the present embodiment, when performing the automatic setting by selecting the “automatic” selection image 976, the temporary selection music, the non-selected music, and the melody pattern of the selected music are all set to the default settings.

  The selection determination unit image 977 is an image simulating the selection determination unit 21 and is an image indicating that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by an operation on the selection determination unit 21. In the selection determination part image 977, the characters “select” are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214, and the selection buttons 211 to 214 are displayed. The corresponding image is highlighted. Further, the images corresponding to the selection buttons 211 to 214 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. Further, in the selection determination part image 977, the character corresponding to the determination button 21B is marked with “determined”, indicating that the operation should be performed when selecting the temporarily selected item.

<Step S3901>
Returning to the description of FIG. 61, in step S3901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has been started (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not been started (step S3901: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S3903.

<Step S3902>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3901: YES), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF (step S3902), and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). Determine whether.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3904, and if it is determined that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3903: No) Goes to step S3905.

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the MPU 51 temporarily selects the melody pattern setting screen 97 according to whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. Temporary selection display change processing is performed for moving the display to one in either the up / down / left / right directions. When the process of step S3904 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3905: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3906, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3905: No). The melody pattern setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 62) “return to one” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 “returns to one” is selected (step S3906: YES), the process proceeds to step S3907, and determines that the selection image 974 “returns one” is not selected. If so (step S3906: NO), the process proceeds to step S3908.

<Step S3907>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 “return to one” has been selected (step S3906: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 54B). ) And the setting item selection screen transfer process to be transferred to (see FIG. 55) (step S3907). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 62) of “return to the top menu” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 “return to top menu” has been selected (step S3908: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3909, and determines that the selection image 975 “return to top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S3908: No), the process proceeds to step S3910.

<Step S3909>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is selected (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53B and FIG. Top menu screen transition processing to be shifted to (see FIG. 54D) is executed (step S3909). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off while setting the top menu screen display flag to on and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “Random” selection image 976 (see FIG. 62) on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “Random”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S3910: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3911 and determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has not been selected (step S3910). S3910: No), the process proceeds to step S3912.

<Step S3911>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 has been selected (step S3910: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music to the default (step S3911). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus part for the temporarily selected music, and the output start from the singing part (A melody part) for the already selected music as the selected music. The melody pattern 1 and the unselected music as the selected music are the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus part (see FIG. 38).

<Step S3912>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 has not been selected (step S3910: No), that is, the player's operation on the decision button 21B is any one of “return to one”, “return to the top menu”, and “automatic”. If the operation does not correspond to the item, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the setting temporarily selected in the temporarily selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already selected music setting image 973 (step S3912). ). For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus portion is sung for the temporarily selected music, and the unselected music as the selected music is sung. The melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) and the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus portion are set for the already selected music as the selected music. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and setting time of the melody pattern in the RAM 512. As a result, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) can be displayed in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69 described later.

  As described above, in step S3912, the player selects and determines the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music, and the setting of the unselected music as the selected music and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music. This can be done by operating the unit 21. Therefore, the player can select whether to listen to the tentatively selected music and the selected music from the beginning or from the highest climax part according to his / her preference. This makes it easy to determine whether the tentatively selected music is his / her favorite music, and it is possible to enjoy the selected music according to his / her preference in any case of the unselected music and the already selected music.

<Step S3913>
In step S3913, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a melody pattern setting flag to ON for an item set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Here, the melody pattern setting flag includes a temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag for a temporarily selected music, an unselected music melody pattern setting flag for an unselected music, and an already selected music melody pattern setting flag for an already selected music. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 62, the unselected music melody pattern setting flag and the unselected music and the selected music set in a melody pattern different from the default setting are displayed. The selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON.

<Step S3914>
In step S3914, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). That is, when setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off while setting the top menu screen display flag to on and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

[Music list display setting screen processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen process (step S3412 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music list display setting screen process, a non-selected music image 834 corresponding to a disliked music (non-selected music) of the music selection image 83 and a selected music image 831 (refer to FIG. 25) corresponding to a favorite music (selected music) in the jackpot game are displayed. The process for performing the display setting regarding the presence or absence (display mode) is executed. 64A shows an example of a music list display setting screen 98, and FIGS. 64B, 65A, and 65B show an example of the display mode of the music selection image display screen 82. FIG. . Hereinafter, the display mode of the music list display setting screen 98 and the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music list display setting screen 98 shown in FIG. 64A is a screen for setting the display mode of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game. . The music list display setting screen 98 includes selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977 as well as the melody pattern setting screen 97 in addition to the disliked music selection image 981 and the favorite music selection image 982. Note that the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit image 977 are the same as those in the melody pattern setting screen 97, and thus description thereof is omitted. In the following, in the same way as the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit image 977 on the melody pattern setting screen 97, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  The disliked music selection image 981 is an image for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked music selection (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. The disliked music selection image 981 includes a display selection image that is selected when setting to display the non-selected music image 834 and a non-display selection image that is selected when setting to hide the non-selected music image 834 is performed. Have. In the present embodiment, “hide the non-selected music image 834” means that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed but the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that it is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be non-displayed, the music selection image display screen 82 is displayed as shown in FIG.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be non-displayed. According to such another embodiment, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to non-display, the non-selected music that was not selected by the player even though it was previously selected as the initial temporary selection music is erroneously displayed. Can be avoided.

  The favorite music selection image 982 is an image for setting whether or not to display the already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (already selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. The favorite music selection image 982 is a display selection image that is selected when setting to display the already selected music image 831 and a non-display selection image that is selected when setting to hide the already selected music image 831 are performed. Have. In the present embodiment, “hide the selected music image 831” does not mean that the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not displayed, but the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that it is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the setting is made so that the previously selected music image 831 is not displayed, the music selection image display screen 82 is displayed as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the setting which hides the already selected music image 831 is performed, it can also be considered as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the already selected music is not displayed. According to such another embodiment, when the previously selected music image 831 is set to non-display, it is possible to avoid repeatedly selecting the previously selected music previously selected by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (B), when both the non-selected music image 834 and the previously selected music image 831 are set to non-display, the music selection images 83 other than the temporarily selected music image 832 are displayed in the same manner. The

<Step S4001>
Returning to FIG. 63, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has been started (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4002, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not been started (step S4001: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S4003.

<Step S4002>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF (step S4002), and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). Determine whether.

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4004. When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4003: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S4005.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 on the music list display setting screen 98. Temporary selection display change processing is performed for moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4004 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4006, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4005: No). The music list display setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 “return to one” (see FIG. 64A) on the music list display setting screen 98 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4007 and determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” has not been selected. If so (step S4006: No), the process proceeds to step S4008.

<Step S4007>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 “return to one” has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 64A). A setting item selection screen transition process for transition to FIG. 54 (B) and FIG. 55) is executed (step S4007). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on while setting the music list display setting screen display flag to off, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4008>
In step S4008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “return to top menu” selection image 975 (see FIG. 64A) on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is selected (step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4009, and determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is not selected. If so (step S4008: No), the process proceeds to step S4010.

<Step S4009>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53). The top menu screen transition process for transitioning to (B) and FIG. 54 (D)) is executed (step S4009). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the music list display setting screen display flag to off, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4010>
In step S4010, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “Random” selection image 976 (see FIG. 64A) on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4011, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4010). S4010: No), the process proceeds to step S4012.

<Step S4011>
When it is determined that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked selection music (non-selection music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 25). And the display setting of the already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (already selected music) is set to the default (step S4011). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4012>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4010: No), that is, the player's operation on the decision button 21B is any one of “return to one”, “return to top menu”, and “automatic”. If the operation does not correspond to the above item, the MPU 51 sets the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image to the settings temporarily selected for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) and the favorite selected music (already selected music). 831 (see FIG. 25) is set (step S4012). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 64A, the non-selected music image 834 is set to be displayed and the already selected music image 831 is set to be non-displayed. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and setting time of the music selection image 83 in the RAM 512. Thereby, the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) can be displayed in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71 described later.

  As described above, in step S4012, the display of the already selected music image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 can be set to display or non-display, so that the display mode is adapted to the player's preference. The music selection image 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the speaker 26 based on the music selection image 83 in the display mode set by the player. In addition, the player performs the non-display setting of the selected music image 831, so that, for example, the music selection image 831, the previously selected music image 831 corresponding to the previously selected music selected by the previous player is included in the music selection image 83. In some cases, the music selection image 83 that does not include the already selected music image 831 can be displayed. Similarly, the player performs a non-display setting of the non-selected music image 834 so that, for example, the music selection image 83 includes the non-selected music image 834 for the non-selected music that was not previously selected by the player. In such a case, the music selection image 83 that does not include the non-selected music image 834 can be displayed.

<Step S4013>
In step S4013, the MPU 51 performs a non-display setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a non-display setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “non-display” different from the default setting. Here, the non-display setting flag includes a non-selected music image non-display setting flag for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) and a selected music image non-display setting flag for the favorite selected music (pre-selected music). For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 64A, the selected music image is not displayed for a favorite selected music (selected music) that has a display setting different from the default setting. The display setting flag is set to on.

<Step S4014>
In step S4014, the MPU 51 performs a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). Run. That is, when the display setting of the unselected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the music list display setting screen display flag to off, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Song selection button effect setting screen processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen process (step S3414 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting screen process, a process for performing settings related to the music selection button effect that is executed when the music is selected in the jackpot game is executed. FIG. 67 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting screen 99. In the following, the music selection button effect setting screen 99 will be described first with reference to FIG. 67, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music selection button effect setting screen 99 shown in FIG. 67 is a screen for making settings related to the music selection button effect that is executed when a song is selected in the jackpot game. The music selection button effect setting screen 99 includes the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection in the same manner as the melody pattern setting screen 97, in addition to the expectation suggestion effect setting image 991, the probability variation determined effect setting image 992, and the reserved villa determined effect setting image 993. The determination part image 977 is included.

  The expectation level suggestion effect setting image 991 is an image for setting whether or not the expectation level suggestion effect is executed when a music piece is selected in the jackpot game. This expectation level suggestion effect setting image 991 is an execution selection image (“execute” image) that is set to execute the expectation level suggestion effect, and a non-execution selection image that is set to not execute the expectation level suggestion effect ( Image "do not execute"). In addition, the expectation degree suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the expectation degree that the promotion effect is executed as described above, and in this embodiment, the suggestion effects 1 to 8 described with reference to FIG. 44 are applicable.

  The probability variation confirmed effect setting image 992 is an image for setting whether or not the probability variation confirmed effect is to be executed when a song is selected in the jackpot game. The probability variation confirmed effect setting image 992 includes an execution selection image (“execute” image) that sets execution of the probability variation confirmed effect, and a non-execution selected image that sets not to execute the probability variation confirmed effect (“do not execute”). Image). Note that the probability variation confirmed effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the promoted effect is executed as described above, and in this embodiment, the confirmed effect 1 and the confirmed effect 3 described with reference to FIG.

  The reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect setting image 993 is an image for setting whether or not the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect setting is executed when a song is selected in the jackpot game. This reserved consecutive resort fixed effect setting image 993 is an execution selection image (“execute” image) that sets execution of the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect and non-executed that sets not to execute the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect. It has a selected image (an image of “do not execute”). It should be noted that the reserved consecutive resort confirmed effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive resort is performed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the confirmed effect 2 and the confirmed effect 4 described with reference to FIG. 44 are applicable.

<Step S4101>
Returning to the description of FIG. 66, in step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has been started (step S4101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4102, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not been started (step S4101: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S4103.

<Step S4102>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF (step S4102), and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4103>
In step S4103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). Determine whether.

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4104. When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4103: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S4105.

<Step S4104>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 on the music selection button effect setting screen 99. Temporary selection display change processing is performed for moving the selection display in one direction up, down, left and right. When the process of step S4104 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4105>
In step S4105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4106, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4105: No). The music selection button effect setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S4106>
In step S4106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a selection image 974 (see FIG. 67) of “return to one” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” is selected (step S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4107, and determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” is not selected. If so (step S4106: No), the process proceeds to step S4108.

<Step S4107>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 “return to one” has been selected (step S4106: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 54 (FIG. 54). B) and the setting item selection screen transition process to be shifted to (see FIG. 55) is executed (step S4107). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to ON while setting the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4108>
In step S4108, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 67) of “return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is selected (step S4108: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4109, and determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is not selected. If so (step S4108: No), the process proceeds to step S4110.

<Step S4109>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53B). And the top menu screen shift processing to shift to (see FIG. 54D) is executed (step S4109). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen display process.

<Step S4110>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “Random” selection image 976 (see FIG. 67) on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4111, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4110). (S4110: No), the process proceeds to step S4112.

<Step S4111>
If it is determined that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 performs an effect regarding whether or not to perform an expectation suggestion effect, a probability change confirmation effect, and a reserved villa confirmation effect as a music selection button effect. The setting is set to default (step S4111). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the reserved villa confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4112>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, the player's operation on the decision button 21B is any one of “return to one”, “return to the top menu”, and “automatic”. If the operation does not correspond to the above item, the MPU 51 sets the performance execution setting regarding whether or not to execute the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmed effect, and the reserved villa confirmed effect to the temporarily selected setting (step S4112). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 67, the expectation suggestion effect is set to execute, the probability variation determination effect is executed, and the reserved villa determination effect is set to non-execution. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting contents and setting time of the music selection button effect in the RAM 512. Thereby, the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) can be displayed in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73 described later.

  In this way, in step S4112, the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be set individually for the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the reserved villa confirmation effect, so the music selection button effect is executed according to the player's preference. Can be made. Thereby, the player can enjoy the selection operation of the music in the jackpot game in a form suitable for him.

  Specifically, the player sets the expectation degree suggestion effect to the execution, for example, the determination operation for the decision button 21B for selecting the music is the expectation degree of the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm. On the other hand, by setting the expectation suggestion effect to non-execution, the expectation suggestion effect is not executed even if the decision operation is performed. The jackpot game can be enjoyed with the expectation that the game state or the 16R probability variation jackpot game state is expected.

  In addition, the player confirms whether or not the determination operation for the determination button 21B for selecting a song is the 5R probability variation big hit gaming state or the 16R probability variation big hit gaming state by setting the probability variation finalized effect to execution. Can be enjoyed as an act for. On the other hand, by setting the probability variation confirmed effect to non-execution, the probability variation confirmed effect will not be executed even if the decision operation is performed. Therefore, the 5R probability variation big hit gaming state without worrying about whether or not the probability variation confirmed effect is performed. Alternatively, the jackpot game can be enjoyed while expecting that it is in the 16R probability variable jackpot game state.

  Furthermore, the player enjoys the determination operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song as an action for confirming whether or not the reserved consecutive resort is generated by setting the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect to execution. be able to. On the other hand, by setting non-execution of the reserved continuous villa finalizing effect, even if the determination operation is performed, the reserved continuous villa finalizing effect is not executed. The game can be enjoyed with the expectation that the reservation will be generated.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 performs an effect non-execution setting flag setting process in accordance with the player setting. Specifically, the music selection button effect flag is set to ON for an item set to “do not execute” different from the default setting. Here, the effect non-execution setting flag includes an expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, a probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag, and an on-hold gained resort confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 67, the reserved consecutive resort determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for the reserved consecutive resort determined effect different from the default setting.

<Step S4114>
In step S4114, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the setting for the presence / absence of execution for the music selection button effect is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Setting history selection process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting history selection process (step S3416 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 56, in the setting history selection process, the selection decision unit 21 by the player is determined based on the music selection related items at the time of the big hit game displayed on the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54C and 56). In accordance with the item selected by the operation on, a process for shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to various setting screens 87 to 89 is executed (see FIG. 56). In the following, as the setting history selection process, the music selection related items are the melody pattern, the music list display (music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect as in the setting item selection process described with reference to FIG. The case will be described as an example, but the same change as the setting item selection process can be made regarding the music selection related items.

<Step S4201>
In step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has been started (step S4201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4202, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not been started (step S4201: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF (step S4202), and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4203>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4204. If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4203: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
In step S4204, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, as in the temporary selection display change processing in step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. Accordingly, a temporary selection display change process for moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display one up or down on the setting history selection screen 96 is executed. When the process of step S4204 ends, the MPU 51 ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4206, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4205: No). The setting history selection process is terminated.

<Step S4206>
In step S4206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 961 (see FIG. 56) of the “melody pattern setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 961 of the “melody pattern setting history” is selected (step S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4207, and the selection image 961 of the “melody pattern setting history” is not selected. (Step S4206: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4207>
When it is determined that the selection image 961 of the “melody pattern setting history” is selected (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern from the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54C and FIG. 56). A melody pattern setting history screen transition process for transition to the history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) is executed (step S4207). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to ON while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4208>
In step S4208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a selection image 962 (see FIG. 56) of the “music list display setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is the “music list display setting history”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 962 of the “music list display setting history” has been selected (step S4208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4209, and the selection image 962 of the “music list display setting history” is selected. If it is determined that it is not present (step S4208: NO), the process proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4209>
If it is determined that the selection image 962 of the “music list display setting history” has been selected (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen as shown in FIG. The music list display setting history screen transition process to be shifted to 88 is executed (step S4209). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, while setting the music list display setting history screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4210>
In step S4210, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 963 (see FIG. 56) of the “song selection button effect setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “music selection button effect setting history”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4211, and the selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” is selected. If it is determined that it is not present (step S4210: NO), the process proceeds to step S4212.

<Step S4211>
If it is determined that the selection image 963 of “music selection button effect setting history” has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 as shown in FIG. The process proceeds to 89 (step S4211). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection history screen display flag to OFF, while setting the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting history selection processing.

<Step S4212>
In step S4212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 964 (see FIG. 56) “return to one” on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 964 “return to one” is selected (step S4212: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4213, and determines that the selection image 964 “returns one” is not selected. If so (step S4212: NO), the process proceeds to step S4214.

<Step S4213>
When it is determined that the selection image 964 “return to one” has been selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. Step S4213). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to ON while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4214>
When the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than “melody pattern setting history”, “music list display setting history”, “music selection button effect setting history”, and “return one”, Since it can be determined that “return to top menu” has been selected, as shown in FIG. 56, a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S4214). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF and sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Melody pattern setting history screen processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen process (step S3418 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting history screen process, a process is performed in which settings relating to the temporarily selected music output from the speaker 26 and the melody pattern (start of music output) of the selected music in the jackpot game are performed based on the setting history. FIG. 70 shows an example of a melody pattern setting history screen 87. In the following, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 will be described first with reference to FIG. 70, and then the melody pattern setting screen history processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The melody pattern setting history screen 87 shown in FIG. 70 is used for setting the temporarily selected music in the jackpot game, the unselected music as the selected music, and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music based on the setting history. This is the screen. The melody pattern setting history screen 87 is a setting history display image 871 and a history selection image 872 that display the melody pattern settings of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music a plurality of times, as well as selected images 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit. Image 977 is included.

  The setting history display image 871 shows the histories 1 to 3 regarding the setting of the melody pattern for three times including the current melody pattern setting. Each of the melody pattern setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on the set time and information on past settings of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music.

  The history selection image 872 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting contents of the history 1. The history 2 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting contents of the history 2. The history 3 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. Further, the histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed according to the operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 is displayed. In conjunction with the change of .about.3, the histories 1-3 temporarily selected in the setting history display image 871 vary.

<Step S4301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 69, in step S4301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has been started (step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4302, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not been started (step S4301: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4301: YES), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF (step S4302), and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4303>
In step S4303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). Determine whether.

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4304. When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4303: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S4305.

<Step S4304>
In step S4304, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 on the melody pattern setting history screen 87. Temporary selection display change processing is performed for moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4304 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting history screen process.

<Step S4305>
In step S4305, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4305: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4305: No). The melody pattern setting history screen process is terminated.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 70) of “Return to melody” on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” is selected (step S4306: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4307, and determines that the selection image 974 “returns one” is not selected. If so (step S4306: NO), the process proceeds to step S4308.

<Step S4307>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 “return to one” is selected (step S4306: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54 (FIG. 54). A setting history selection screen transition process to be shifted to (C) and FIG. 56) is executed (step S4307). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to on and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4308>
In step S4308, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a selection image 975 (see FIG. 70) of “Return to top menu” on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 “return to top menu” has been selected (step S4308: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4309, and determines that the selection image 975 “return to top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4308: No), the process proceeds to step S4310.

<Step S4309>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 “return to top menu” has been selected (step S4308: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53B). And the top menu screen shift processing to shift to (see FIG. 54D) is executed (step S4309). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off while setting the top menu screen display flag to on and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4310>
In step S4310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “Random” selection image 976 (see FIG. 70) on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4311, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4310). S4310: No), the process proceeds to step S4312.

<Step S4311>
If it is determined that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the temporary selection music, the unselected music, and the melody pattern of the selected music to the default (step S4311). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is that the melody pattern 1 starts output from the chorus part for the temporarily selected music, the melody pattern 2 starts output from the chorus part for the unselected music, and sings for the selected music This is a melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) (see FIG. 38).

<Step S4312>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4310: No), the player's operation on the decision button 21B is any of “return to one”, “return to top menu”, and “automatic”. When the operation does not correspond to the item, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the same setting as the setting history temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 (step S4312). For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 70, the melody pattern is set to the same setting as the history 2. That is, for the temporarily selected music, the melody pattern 1 that starts output from the singing part (A melody part), for the unselected music, the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus part, and for the selected music from the chorus part Is set to the melody pattern 2 which is the output start.

  As described above, in step S4312, the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music, and the setting of the unselected music as the selected music and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music are displayed in the melody pattern setting history screen. 87, the player can perform the same operation as when the melody pattern is set according to the melody pattern setting screen 97 transferred from the setting item selection screen 95. In addition, the setting of the tentatively selected tune and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected tune can be selected from the setting history, so that the melody pattern can be set to the same content as the past setting content with a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. Can do. Therefore, the player can set a desired melody pattern according to the melody pattern setting history screen 87 with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 when he wants to return to the previous setting.

<Step S4313>
In step S4313, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for an item set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 70, the temporary selection music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for the temporary selection music set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. The

<Step S4314>
In step S4314, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when setting the melody pattern of the previously selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833 (see FIG. 25), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen to the top menu screen. 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off while setting the top menu screen display flag to on and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

[Music list display setting history screen processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting history screen process (step S3420 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the music list display setting history screen process, the unselected music image 834 corresponding to the disliked music (non-selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game and the selected music image 831 (refer to FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music). A process of performing display settings related to the presence / absence of display (display mode) based on the setting history is executed. FIG. 72 shows an example of the music list display setting history screen 88. In the following, the music list display setting history screen 88 will be described first with reference to FIG. 72, and then the music list display setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music list display setting history screen 88 shown in FIG. 72 is used to set whether or not to display the music selection image 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game based on the setting history. It is a screen. The music list display setting history screen 88 is a selection history image 881, a history selection image 882, and a selection image that displays the setting of whether or not to display disliked music (non-selected music) and favorite music (already selected music). 974-976 and the selection determination part image 977 are included.

  The setting history display image 881 shows the histories 1 to 3 regarding the setting for three times including the setting of whether to display the current non-selected music and the already selected music. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on the set time, and information on presence / absence of display of non-selected music and already selected music.

  The history selection image 882 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting whether to display non-selected music and already selected music in the setting contents of history 1. The history 2 selected image is for setting whether to display non-selected music and already selected music in the setting contents of history 2. The history 3 selected image is for setting whether or not to display unselected music and already selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. In addition, the histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 can be changed according to an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 is displayed. In conjunction with the change of .about.3, the histories 1-3 temporarily selected in the setting history display image 881 vary.

<Step S4401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 71, in step S4401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4402, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4401: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S4403.

<Step S4402>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4401: YES), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF (step S4402), and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4403>
In step S4403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). Determine whether.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4404. If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4403: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S4405.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 on the music list display setting history screen. Temporary selection display change processing is performed for moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4405>
In step S4405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4406, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4405: No). The music list display setting history screen process is terminated.

<Step S4406>
In step S4406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 72) “return to one” on the music list display setting history screen 88 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” is selected (step S4406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4407, and determines that the selection image 974 “returns one” is not selected. If so (step S4406: NO), the process proceeds to step S4408.

<Step S4407>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 “return to one” has been selected (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (C) and the setting history selection screen transition process to be shifted to (see FIG. 56) is executed (step S4407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON while setting the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 72) of “return to top menu” on the music list display setting history screen 88 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is selected (step S4408: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4409, and determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is not selected. If so (step S4408: No), the process proceeds to step S4410.

<Step S4409>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” is selected (step S4408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53B). ) And FIG. 54D) are executed (step S4409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4410>
In step S4410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “Random” selection image 976 (see FIG. 72) on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “Random”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4411, and if the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4410). S4410: No), the process proceeds to step S4412.

<Step S4411>
If it is determined that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked selection music (non-selection music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 25). And the display setting of the already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (already selected music) is set to default (step S4411). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4412>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4410: No), that is, the player's operation on the decision button 21B is any one of “return to one”, “return to top menu”, and “automatic”. If the operation does not correspond to this item, the MPU 51 performs display setting of the non-selected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) as the setting history setting temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 (see FIG. 25). Step S4412). For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. Specifically, both the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the disliked music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 corresponding to the favorite music (non-selected music) are set to display.

  As described above, in step S4412, display settings for displaying or not displaying the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (hate music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 are displayed on the music list display setting history screen 88. Since it can be performed by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 based on this, the same effect as in the case of performing display setting according to the music list display setting screen 98 transferred from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, the display settings of the previously selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (hate music) image 834 can be selected from the setting history, so that the same contents as the past setting contents can be obtained by a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. The display can be set. Therefore, the player can perform a desired display setting according to the music list display setting history screen 88 with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 when the player wants to return to the previous setting.

<Step S4413>
In step S4413, the MPU 51 performs a music image non-display setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the music image non-display setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “non-display” different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 72, since the same setting as the default setting is made, the non-selected music image non-display setting flag and the previously selected music image non-display setting flag None of these are set to on.

<Step S4414>
In step S4414, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). . That is, when the display setting of the unselected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

[Music selection button effect setting history screen processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting history screen process (step S3422 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting history screen process, a process for performing effect execution settings related to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a music piece in the jackpot game is executed based on the setting history. FIG. 74 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. In the following, the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 will be described first with reference to FIG. 74, and then the music selection button effect setting history screen process will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 shown in FIG. 74 is a screen for performing settings related to effects executed when a song is selected in the jackpot game based on the setting history. The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 is a setting history display image that individually displays a plurality of settings for whether or not to execute a music selection button effect including an expectation suggestion effect, a probability change confirmation effect, and a reserved villa confirmation effect. In addition to 891, a history selection image 892, selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977 are included.

  The setting history display image 891 shows the histories 1 to 3 regarding the setting for three times including the setting for whether or not the current music selection button effect is executed. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information related to the set time and information related to whether or not each music selection button effect is executed.

  The history selection image 892 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 3. In addition, the histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892 can be changed according to an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892 is displayed. In conjunction with the change of .about.3, the histories 1-3 temporarily selected in the setting history display image 891 change.

<Step S4501>
Returning to the description of FIG. 73, in step S4501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has been started (step S4501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4502, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not been started (step S4501: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S4503.

<Step S4502>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF (step S4502), and ends the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4503>
In step S4503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). Determine whether.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4504, and if the MPU 51 determines that no operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4503: No). To step S4505.

<Step S4504>
In step S4504, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. Temporary selection display change processing for moving the temporary selection display to one in any of the up, down, left and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4505>
In step S4505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4506, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4505: No), The music selection button effect setting history screen process is terminated.

<Step S4506>
In step S4506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a selection image 974 (see FIG. 74) of “return to one” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” has been selected (step S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4507 and determines that the selection image 974 “return to one” has not been selected. If so (step S4506: No), the process proceeds to step S4508.

<Step S4507>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 “return to one” has been selected (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (C) and the setting history selection screen transition process to be shifted to (see FIG. 56) (step S4507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF, while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4508>
In step S4508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 74) of “return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4508: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4509, and determines that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4508: No), the process proceeds to step S4510.

<Step S4509>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4508: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53B). ) And FIG. 54D) are executed (step S4509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen processing.

<Step S4510>
In step S4510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “Random” selection image 976 (see FIG. 74) on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4511, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “Random” selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4510). S4510: No), the process proceeds to step S4512.

<Step S4511>
If it is determined that the “Random” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 performs an effect regarding whether or not to perform an expectation suggestion effect, a probability change confirmation effect, and a reserved villa confirmation effect as a music selection button effect. The setting is set to default (step S4511). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the reserved villa confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4512>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, the player's operation on the decision button 21B is any one of “return to one”, “return to the top menu”, and “automatic”. If the operation does not correspond to this item, the MPU 51 sets the game setting relating to whether or not to execute the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmed effect, and the reserved villa confirmed effect to the temporarily selected setting (step S4512). For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. Specifically, all of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the reserved villa confirmation effect are set to non-execution.

  As described above, in step S4512, the execution selection setting for the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be performed by the player operating the selection determination unit 21 based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. It is possible to enjoy the same effect as when performing execution setting according to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to be transferred. In addition, since the performance execution setting for the music selection button effect can be selected from the setting history, it is possible to perform the effect execution setting with the same content as the past setting content with a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. Therefore, the player can perform a desired performance execution setting based on the music selection button performance setting history screen 89 with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 when the player wants to return to the previous setting.

<Step S4513>
In step S4513, the MPU 51 performs an effect non-execution setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, an effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “do not execute” different from the default setting. For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 74, the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the reserved profit range confirmation operation that are set to be different from the default settings. The expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag, and the hold profit ranger confirmed effect non-execution setting flag are all set to ON.

<Step S4514>
In step S4514, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)). That is, when the effect execution setting for the music selection button effect is completed, the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the player operates the selection determination unit 21 to select the temporarily selected music image 832 that enables selection of music included in the already selected music. In this state, the previously selected music can be selected by performing a determination operation on the selection determination unit 21 in this state. Therefore, the player can select a previously selected song that has been previously selected with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21, and can output the already selected song from the speaker 26. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game.

  In addition, the player can display the unselected music image 833 as the temporarily selected music image 832 by operating the selection determining unit 21, and in this state, the player can select the previously selected music image 833 by performing a determination operation on the selection determining unit 21. Unselected music that has not been played can be output from the speaker 26. Therefore, the player can select an unselected song with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21 and output the unselected song from the speaker 26. Thus, the player can not only select the selected music piece and the unselected music piece, but also select either the selected music piece or the non-selected music piece with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21. A desired music piece can be easily selected and output from the speaker 26.

  Further, when displaying the music selection image 83, the temporary selection music to be displayed as the temporary selection music image 832 is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the speaker 26. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected music, the player can listen to the unselected music in the process so far, and the player can enjoy the unselected music. It is possible to secure an opportunity to communicate.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as various processing procedures will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the default setting, the output start of the temporarily selected music is the chorus part for both the already selected music and the unselected music, and the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (the singing part). ), The case where the unselected music is a chorus portion has been described. That is, in the first embodiment, a case has been described in which, when the temporarily selected music is selected as the selected music, the output of the selected music is started again from the A melody part (singing part) or the chorus part.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the selected music (temporarily selected music) is an already selected music in the default setting, the selected music is selected from the continuation of the temporarily selected music output from the speaker 26 when the music is selected. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is output from the speaker 26, that is, when the previously selected music is selected, the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the temporarily selected music is output from the rust portion in order to effectively convey the goodness of the music, and the selected tune is generally output from the rust portion in order to increase the degree of attention to the jackpot game. It is. In this case, when music selection is performed, the temporarily selected music output at the temporary selection stage is temporarily interrupted, and the chorus portion of the same music as the temporary selected music is started again when the music is selected. Therefore, the player listens to the rust portion of the same music in a short time.

  However, if the selected music is the player's favorite selected music, since this selected music is the music previously selected, the selected music can be listened to in duplicate in the short time. This may result in getting tired of. In addition, there is a concern that the player's tension that has been raised by listening to the chorus portion of the favorite music may drop at a stretch by temporarily cutting the temporarily selected music. Further, since the start of the output of the selected music is the chorus part, in the jackpot game that executes about 5 round games (open / close execution mode), the music start part (for example, intro part or A You may not be able to listen to the melody (singing part).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the previously selected music is output from the A melody part (singing part) as the temporarily selected music and selected. If the music is an already selected music, the temporarily selected music is continuously output. That is, when selecting a previously selected music, it is output from the music start part at the stage of temporary selection, and even when a music is selected, the selected music is output continuously from the stage of temporary selection. Therefore, at least in the temporary selection stage, the music start portion of the already selected music can be heard reliably, and the rust portion of the same music is output in a short time from the temporary selection stage to the music selection stage. Therefore, even when the selected music is repeatedly selected, it is possible to prevent the user from getting bored early with respect to the selected music. In addition, since the previously selected music is output continuously from the temporary selection stage, the player can increase the tension from the music start part to the rust part and maintain the tension high, Interest for jackpot games is improved.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table used in the present embodiment, and FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of temporary selection music output processing executed in the present embodiment. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of selected music output processing executed in the present embodiment. That is, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26 when the already selected music is selected, and thus the first embodiment described above. Is different from the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 75, the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76, and the selected music output process shown in FIG. In the provisional selection music output process shown in FIG. 76 and the selection music output process shown in FIG. 77, the melody pattern setting of the temporary selection music and the selection music is set differently from the default setting by the player for the sake of simplicity of explanation. If you do not consider it. For example, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76, the step corresponding to step S2703 in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40 in the first embodiment is omitted. In the selected music output process shown in FIG. 77, steps corresponding to steps S2806, S2809, and S2810 in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 41 in the first embodiment are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the temporarily selected music including the initial temporarily selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that all of the music A to the music T when the previously selected music is temporarily selected, that is, A When the output from the melody (the singing part) is set to start and when an unselected music piece is temporarily selected, all of the music pieces A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus part. On the other hand, for the selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that all of music A to music T are set to the continuation part of the temporarily selected music, that is, the output of the temporarily selected music, when the previously selected music is selected. When the selected song is selected, all of the songs A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (singing part). Here, the continuation of the output of the temporarily selected music means that the temporarily selected music is output without any interruption, but for the reason of operating the decision button 21B and outputting the operation sound, the temporary selected music is temporarily output. The case where the selected music is interrupted is also included. In the embodiments other than the present embodiment, the case where the output of the temporarily selected music is continued is also interpreted as the same as the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, since the default setting of the temporarily selected music is different from that of the first embodiment, the previously selected music is temporarily selected in the temporarily selected music output process of the present embodiment. If this is the case (step S2702: No), the melody pattern 1 which is the default setting is selected unconditionally (step S4601), and the previously selected music is output as the temporarily selected music from the A melody part (singing part). (Step S2707).

  As shown in FIG. 77, in this embodiment, since the default setting of the selected music is different from that of the first embodiment, in the selected music output process of the present embodiment, a previously selected music is temporarily selected. (Step S2801: No), the continuation of output of the temporarily selected music which is the default setting is unconditionally selected (Step S4701), and the temporary selection which has been output from the speaker 26 when the previously selected music is selected as the selected music. The music is continuously output from the speaker 26 (step S2811).

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the player selects a previously selected song, the player can listen to the already selected song output from the song start portion as a temporarily selected song from the continuation of the portion that was output during the decision operation. it can. That is, when the player selects an already selected song, the player can listen to the selected song continuously from the beginning of the song after the previously selected song is temporarily selected.

  In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuing the temporarily selected music) on condition that the selected music (temporarily selected music) is an already selected music. When the selected music (temporarily selected music) is an unselected music, it is possible to output the selected music from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuing the temporary selected music). In this embodiment, the output of the temporarily selected music is the A melody part (singing out part) in the already selected music and the chorus part in the unselected music, but the output when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music. The start may be a chorus part, and the output start when the temporarily selected music is an unselected music may be an A melody part (singing out part). In this embodiment, the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (singing out part) in the unselected music, but even if the output start when the temporarily selected music is the unselected music is the chorus part Good. Further, in the present embodiment, it has not been considered that the player sets the melody pattern different from the default setting in the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process, but the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process may be executed in consideration that the player sets the melody pattern different from the default setting.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the melody pattern is determined based on whether these music pieces are already selected music pieces or unselected music pieces for the temporarily selected music piece and the selected music piece. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected song and the selected song.

  In the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected music and the selected music, so that the melody pattern table, the temporarily selected music output process, and the selected music output The processing is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table used in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, the default setting of the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music is that, in the 5R jackpot game (5R normal jackpot game and 5R probability variable jackpot game), all of the songs A to T are from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus part. In the 16R jackpot game, all of the music A to the music T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody part (singing part). On the other hand, the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music is that the music A to the music T are all set to the continuation of the temporarily selected music, that is, the output of the temporarily selected music in the 5R jackpot game. All of T are set to the melody pattern 1, that is, the output start from the A melody part (singing out part). That is, in this embodiment, in the case of 5R jackpot (5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot), the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus portion, and the temporary selected music is continuously output when the music selection is made. On the other hand, in the case of 16R jackpot, the temporarily selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part), and the selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part).

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of jackpot games having different advantages for a player are provided as a jackpot game. In the present embodiment, as described above, the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the 16R probability variation jackpot having different advantages are provided. On the other hand, as described above, in the conventional gaming machine, the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus part to effectively convey the goodness of the music, and the selected music is output from the chorus part to increase the degree of attention to the jackpot game. It is common.

  However, if the start of output of both the temporarily selected music and the selected music is set to the chorus part, the temporarily selected music that was output at the stage of the temporary selection is temporarily interrupted, and the chorus part of the same music as the temporarily selected music is It starts again when a song is selected. For this reason, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable or disgusted by listening to the rust portion of the same music in a short time, or when the music is interrupted. Despite such concerns, until the jackpot game with a relatively long game time of about 16R, the output of the temporarily selected music is stopped and the same music is output again from the chorus part as the selected music. The significance of this cannot be found.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of a 5R jackpot game with a relatively short game time, the temporarily selected music is continuously output when the music is selected. In this way, even if the game time is a relatively short 5R jackpot game, the song can be sung as a temporarily selected song, and the selected song can be continuously listened to, so that it is output at the temporary selection stage. It is possible to avoid listening to the rust portion of the same music in a short time without interrupting the temporarily selected music once. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not feel uncomfortable or disgusted by listening to the rust portion of the same music in a short time, or when the music is interrupted.

  On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot with a relatively long game time, the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus part, and the selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part). Therefore, with 16R jackpot, the player can avoid listening to the rust portion of the same music in a short time. In addition, after enjoying the chorus part as the temporarily selected music, it can be listened to from the singing part of the music as the newly selected music. Thereby, in the 16R jackpot game having a relatively long game time, the player can enjoy again and again from the singing of the selected music piece. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable or disgusted when the music is interrupted.

  Here, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music output process executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process executed in the present embodiment. is there. In the provisional selection music output process shown in FIG. 79 and the selection music output process shown in FIG. 80, the melody pattern setting of the temporary selection music and the selection music is set differently from the default setting by the player for the sake of simplicity. If you do not consider it.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in this embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected music (see FIG. 78). In the selected music output process, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not 16R is a big hit. Also, the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music is determined according to the determination result at step S4801 (steps S4802 and S4804), and the temporarily selected music is output according to the determined melody pattern (steps S4803 and S4805).

  Specifically, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a 16R big hit (step S4801). If it is not 16R jackpot (step S4801: No), that is, if it is 5R jackpot, melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of 5R jackpot (step S4802), and the temporarily selected music is the A melody part (singing part). (Step S4803). On the other hand, if it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801: YES), the melody pattern 2 is selected according to the default setting for the 16R jackpot, and the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus portion (step S4904).

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702), a melody pattern is randomly selected (step S4806), and a temporarily selected music is output with a melody pattern according to the selected melody pattern (step S4806). S4807, S4803 and S4805).

  Here, in order for the melody pattern to be selected at random, it is a condition that the promotion flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), but the promotion effect flag is not set to ON in the case of 16R jackpot. . Therefore, since it can be determined that 5R is a big hit when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, 5R satisfying a predetermined condition (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702) is selected by randomly selecting a melody pattern in step S4806. For the jackpot, there may be a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music.

  If the melody pattern 2 is not selected in step S4806 (step S4807: No), that is, if the melody pattern 1 is selected, the temporary selected music piece is A according to the default setting for 5R jackpot as the default setting for 5R jackpot. It is output from the melody part (singing out part) (step S4803). On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected in step S4806 (step S4807: Yes), the temporarily selected music is output from a rust portion different from the default setting for 5R jackpot. Thereby, a contradiction occurs in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music, and it is clearly shown in advance that the promotion effect is executed before the promotion effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (exactly the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the selected tune (see FIG. 78). In the output process, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not it is a 5R big hit. Specifically, when the selected music is an already selected music (step S2801: No), when it is the second or subsequent music determination (step S2802: No), or when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF ( Step S2803: No) It is determined whether or not it is a 5R jackpot (Step S4901). If it is a 5R jackpot (step S4901: YES), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting for the 5R jackpot (step S4902). On the other hand, if it is not 5R jackpot (step S4901: No), that is, if it is 16R jackpot, melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of 16R jackpot, and the selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part) ( Step S4903).

  If the conditions for receiving the contradictory output lottery are satisfied (Yes in all steps S2801 to S2803), the contradictory output lottery is performed (step S2804), and the contradictory output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the temporarily selected music is continuously output (step S4902). That is, in order to receive the contradictory output lottery, it is a condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as described above. Since it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is won, if the contradictory output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902).

  On the other hand, if the contradictory output lottery is won (step S2805: Yes), the selected music piece is output with the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting of 5R jackpot. Thereby, a contradiction occurs in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music piece, and it is clearly shown in advance that the promotion effect is executed before the promotion effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, since the default setting of the selected music in the case of 5R jackpot is to continue outputting the temporarily selected music, the music is the same both during the temporary selection of music and after the selection of music during a short game time. It is avoided that the part is output and that the music is output from a different part after the music is selected. As a result, in the case of 5R jackpot, since the music can be continuously listened to without a contradiction output lottery, the music can be enjoyed without stress even in a short game time. On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot gaming state where the game time is long, the player listens to the chorus portion of the temporarily selected song and then listens again to the selected song that is the same song as the temporarily selected song from the A melody portion (singing out portion). be able to. For this reason, in the 16R jackpot gaming state, since the game time is sufficient, the selected music including the chorus part of the music can be fully enjoyed from the A melody part (singing out part).

  Further, whether or not a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the player is in a more advantageous gaming state can be determined based on whether or not there is a contradiction in the music output start at the time of provisional selection or selection. Therefore, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the temporarily selected music and the output start portion of the selected music. Thus, the operation on the selection button 21A of the selection determination unit 21 for temporarily selecting a music and the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 for selecting a music is not simply an act of temporarily selecting or selecting a music. It can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In this embodiment, the selected music is output from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuing the temporarily selected music) on the condition that it is 5R big hit. However, in the case of 16R big hit, It is also possible to output the selected music from the continuation (continuing the provisionally selected music). Of course, the selected music may be output from the continuation of the selected music (continuing the temporarily selected music) for both the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot. Further, in this embodiment, the output of the temporarily selected music starts with the 5R jackpot and the rust portion and the 16R jackpot (the singing portion), but the output start of the temporarily selected music with the 5R jackpot is the A melody portion (the singing portion). ), Or the start of outputting the temporarily selected music for 16R jackpot may be the rust portion. Further, in the present embodiment, it has not been considered that the player sets the melody pattern different from the default setting in the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process, but the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process may be executed in consideration that the player sets the melody pattern different from the default setting.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, as the song selection button effect process, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, the song selection button effect is provided on the condition that the unselected song is selected in the first song determination. The case where the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect and the reserved villa confirmation effect are executed has been described (see FIG. 42).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as a music selection button effect process, in addition to the conditions of the first embodiment described above, a music selection operation is performed on the condition that repeated operation or long press operation on the determination button 21B is performed in response to the music determination operation. A case where the button effect is executed will be described.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, whether or not the player has performed a determination operation for selecting a song for the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) is determined based on the second determination operation pattern flag (FIG. 18F). ) Is set to ON (see step S2606 in the music selection process in FIG. 39). In other words, in the first embodiment described above, it is determined that the player has performed a song determination operation on the decision button 21B by confirming that an operation on the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1) has started. . As described above, when it is determined that the player has operated the enter button 21B by starting the operation on the enter button 21B (see FIG. 1), is the music selection button effect performed at the moment when the enter button 21B is operated? Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the moment of operating the decision button 21B as to whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation on the determination button 21B is performed. For this reason, unlike the first embodiment described above, while the expectation that the music selection button effect will be performed for a certain time after the start of the operation of the determination button 21B is increased, You can enjoy long press operation. In other words, in this embodiment, whether or not the music selection button effect is executed can be enjoyed in an aspect different from that of the first embodiment described above on the determination button 21B.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 may suggest or clearly indicate to the player that the song selection button effect is executed by a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation on the decision button 21B. By not having the display mode as shown in FIG. 25, for example, it is possible to enjoy the continuous hitting operation and long press operation on the decision button 21B as a so-called back command for executing the music selection button effect.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, in the music selection button effect process of the present embodiment, a determination operation is performed between steps S2902 and S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect process of the first embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether or not a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation has been performed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 20 seconds) (step S5101). Whether or not the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation has been performed when the determination operation is performed is determined based on the determination button operation data (see FIG. 18F). For example, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39, when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has been started by confirming the ON setting of the second determination operation pattern flag (step S2606: Yes), the constant It can be determined whether or not the continuous hitting operation has been performed on the determination button 21B by checking whether the second determination operation pattern flag is turned on / off a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 30 times) within the time. Also, whether or not a long press operation has been performed depending on whether the duration for which the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON has reached a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 15 seconds) within the predetermined time Can be judged.

  Then, when a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation is performed within a certain period after the determining operation (step S5101: Yes), when the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), a 5R certain variable selection button When the effect determination process is executed (step S2904) and the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2905: Yes), the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906). .

  In the present embodiment, when selecting an unselected song, the player can perform a song selection button effect by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation on the decision button 21B. Therefore, the act of selecting a music can be enjoyed as an action for confirming whether or not a music selection button effect is executed by performing a continuous hit operation or a long press operation. Thereby, a player can be made to perform selection of music actively.

  In this embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation on the determination button 21B is performed in response to the music determination operation. However, this condition and the first implementation described above are performed. The music selection button effect may be executed when either one of the conditions in the form (operation on the decision button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing when the operation on the determination button 21B is started or when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether any one of the continuous hit operation and the long press operation has been performed, but only the continuous hit operation on the enter button 21B or only the long press operation is determined in step S5101. It is good.

  In step S2901, it is determined whether or not an unselected song is selected. However, step S2901 may be omitted, and a song selection button effect may be executed even when an already selected song is selected. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already selected music is selected.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as the song selection button effect process, the unselected music is selected by the operation on the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1) in the first music determination. The case where the music selection button effect (expectation suggestion effect, probability change confirmation effect and reserved villa confirmation effect) is executed on condition that it is performed has been described (see FIG. 42). Moreover, in the above-mentioned 4th Embodiment, in addition to the conditions of 1st Embodiment mentioned above as a music selection button effect process, the continuous hit operation or long press operation with respect to the determination button 21B (refer FIG. 1) triggered by music determination operation The case where the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that is performed is described (see FIG. 81). In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the music selection button effect is executed by an operation on the decision button 21B for selecting music.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a music selection button effect process, on the condition that in the first music determination, an unselected music is selected by an operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) different from the determination button 21B. A case where the music selection button effect is executed will be described. In this embodiment, it is assumed that any of the operation on the determination button 21B and the operation on the operation button 20 is effective as the determination operation for music selection. Specifically, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39, the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data shown in FIG. 18A and the second determination of the determination button operation data shown in FIG. When it is confirmed that any one of the operation pattern flags is set to ON, it is determined that the determination operation for the music selection is performed.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, music can be selected by operating the determination button 21B as in the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above. In addition, unlike the above-described first and fourth embodiments, music can be selected by operating the operation buttons 20. Then, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the operation button 20 is operated instead of the determination button 21B. That is, since the music selection button effect is executed by an operation different from that of the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, whether the music selection button effect is executed or not is determined. It can be enjoyed differently from the fourth embodiment.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 may suggest or clearly indicate that the music selection button effect is executed by the operation on the operation button 20, but by not performing such suggestion or indication (for example, By adopting the display mode as shown in FIG. 25, the music determination operation by the operation button 20 can be enjoyed as a back command for executing the music selection button effect.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the music selection button effect process of the present embodiment, an operation on the operation button 20 is performed between step S2902 and step S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect process of the first embodiment described above. To determine whether or not a music piece has been selected (step S5201). Whether or not a music piece has been selected by an operation on the operation button 20 is determined by, for example, whether or not the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data is set to ON. If it is determined in step S5201 that a music piece has been selected by an operation on the operation button 20 (step S5201: Yes), and if the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), a 5R certain variable selection button effect is produced. When the determination process is executed (step S2904) and the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2905: Yes), the 16R probability variable selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906).

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the player is instructed to operate the determination button 21B in order to perform the determination operation. By performing the operation, the music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, interest for the act of selecting music is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the music is determined by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). However, in this condition and the first embodiment described above, The music selection button effect may be executed when any one of the above conditions (operation for the decision button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing of the timing when the operation on the determination button 21B is started and the timing when the operation on the operation button 20 is started.

  In addition, when any one of the conditions in the present embodiment (decision operation for the operation button 20) and the conditions in the above-described fourth embodiment (continuous hit operation or long press operation on the decision button 21B) is satisfied. A music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing of the timing at which the operation on the operation button 20 is started and the timing at which the long press operation or the continuous hitting operation is confirmed. Of course, the music selection button effect can be executed at any timing when any of the conditions in the present embodiment, the conditions in the first embodiment described above, and the conditions in the fourth embodiment described above is satisfied. May be.

  Further, instead of determining the music piece by the determination operation for the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), the music selection button effect is produced when a long press operation or a continuous hit operation is performed on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). It may be executed.

  Further, in the music selection button effect process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not an unselected song is selected in step S2901, but step S2901 is omitted, and even if a previously selected song is selected, a song selection button effect is produced. May be executed. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already selected music is selected.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, it may be described with a reference numeral for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. is not. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The production execution means (51)
As the music selection image (83), it is a temporary selection music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). An image including a selected music image (832) and a selected music image (831) indicating that the music has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Is displayed on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporary selection music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the voice output means (26) is caused to output the temporary selection music, and the temporary selection is performed when the determination operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the audio output means (26) outputs the selected music as the selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to attachment A1, the selected music image indicating that the music has already been selected by the player as the music selection image for allowing the player to select a music is displayed on the image display means. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can very easily find an image for selecting the selected music from the music selection images when selecting the previously selected music that has been selected before. Then, the player can temporarily select the selected music and display it as a temporarily selected music image by operating the operation means while confirming the position of the selected music image in the music selection image. Further, the selected music can be output from the audio output means by performing the determination operation on the operation means in a state where the previously selected music selected previously is displayed as the temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music previously selected with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the selected music from the sound output means.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games to improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix A2]
The effect execution means (51) displays a predetermined number (eg, “10”) of music selection images (83) that are predetermined to a number smaller than the number of the plurality of music pieces (eg, “20”). (341) The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A2, there are prepared a number of songs that cannot be displayed on the image display means at one time, and music selection images for some of the songs are displayed. Even if it exists, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix A3]
The effect execution means (51) displays the temporarily selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) on the image display means (341) so as to be distinguishable. A gaming machine according to A2.

[Appendix A4]
The game machine according to appendix A3, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the already selected music image (831) in a display mode different from the temporarily selected music image (832).

[Appendix A5]
The effect execution means (51) displays the selected music image (832) by displaying an additional image indicating the selected music on at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831). The gaming machine according to appendix A3 or appendix A4, wherein the image display means (341) displays the provisionally selected music image (832) so as to be distinguishable.

[Appendix A6]
The effect execution means (51) displays the selected music image (832) in the predetermined area in the image display means (341), thereby displaying the selected music image (832) as the temporarily selected music. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A3 to appendix A5, wherein the image display means (341) displays the image (832) so as to be distinguishable.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A3 to Supplementary Note A6, since the already selected music image is displayed in a form that can be distinguished from the temporarily selected music image, it is easier to find the already selected music image from the music selection image. Therefore, the convenience in provisional selection and selection of already selected music is further improved.

[Appendix A7]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of the selected music images (831) selected from two or more numbers. To the appendix A6.

[Appendix A8]
Storage means (512) for storing selected music information on the selected music;
The effect execution means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music image (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). A gaming machine according to appendix A7, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7 and Supplementary Note A8, the selected music image having the upper limit number or less selected from the number of two or more is displayed on the image display means. That is, since a plurality of previously selected music images can be displayed, the convenience of temporary selection and selection for a plurality of previously selected music that has been selected in the past is improved. On the other hand, an upper limit is provided for the number of already selected music images, thereby preventing an excessive number of already selected music images from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select a previously selected song based on a moderate number of already selected song images, and the operation burden when selecting a selected song is reduced.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein when the music selection is performed a plurality of times in the special gaming state, the storage means (512) stores only the last selected music as a previously selected music. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9, when the music selection is performed a plurality of times in the special game state, only the last selected music is set as the selected music. Therefore, even if the music selection is performed a plurality of times during execution of one special game state, the final selection music is clarified and the selected music image is occupied by the selected music for one special game state. Can be prevented. Also, for example, if you don't like the selected song and you reselect another song, you can avoid displaying the song you didn't like as a previously selected song image, and select the selected song again Convenience when selecting based on the music image is improved.

[Appendix A10]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be initially displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) selects the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) in the order of selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A7 to appendix A9, wherein the game machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A10, in the music selection image displayed first, the already selected music image for the newly selected music with the new selection date and time is displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can easily find the previously selected music that has been selected most recently when the music selection image is displayed, and can select the music that has been selected most recently by the number of operations on the operation means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the most recently selected music again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A11]
In the initial music selection image (83) initially displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) selects the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A7 to appendix A9, wherein the game machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A11, the selected music image for the selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number) is displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image. That is, the selected music image is displayed as a reflection of the recent music selection tendency by the player. Therefore, the player can easily find the previously selected music that has been selected recently when the music selection image is displayed, and can select the recently selected music again with a small number of operations on the operating means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation load when selecting the recently selected music again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A12]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display all of the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) for different music on the image display means (341). A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A12, since the selected music image does not include a plurality of ones for the same music, even if the upper limit number is provided for the number of displayed selected music images, the music corresponding to the upper limit number is provided. Selected music images for a number of selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player has repeatedly selected the same music and wants to select a previously selected music other than the music, the player can easily find the selected music to be selected. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the previously selected music again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A13]
When the display number of the previously selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the display number is insufficient with respect to the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). ), The unselected music image (833) is displayed as the music selection image (83) according to any one of appendix A7 to appendix A12.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13, even when the number of selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images are displayed instead of the selected music images. Thus, a prescribed number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix A14]
The production execution means (51)
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that it is an unselected music other than the selected music of the plurality of music is further identified in the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A13, wherein the game machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A14, the player can distinguish and recognize an already selected music image that has been selected before and an unselected music image that has not been selected before. By operating the operating means while confirming, it is possible to temporarily select an unselected song and display it as a temporarily selected song image. Therefore, even when the player selects an unselected song instead of an already selected song, the player can select an unselected song with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the unselected song from the audio output means.

[Appendix A15]
When the music execution image (83) is displayed on the image display module (341), the performance execution unit (51) displays the temporarily selected music image (832) and the previously selected music image (831). The gaming machine according to appendix A14, wherein the gaming machine is displayed between the selected music image (833).

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15, at least when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the already selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can change either the previously selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been selected before by changing the temporarily selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means. Even when a song is selected, the target song can be temporarily selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix A16]
The effect execution means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the initial temporary selection music for the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14 or Supplementary A15, wherein the game machine is selected from the unselected musical pieces of the musical piece.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, the initial temporary selected music is selected from the unselected music, and the initial temporary selected music that is the unselected music is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected music, the player can listen to the unselected music in the process so far, and the player can enjoy the unselected music. It is possible to secure an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix A17]
The tentatively selected tune or the selected tune from different parts of the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune depending on whether the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune is the already selected tune. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A14 to appendix A16, wherein output means (26) outputs the output means.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, an unselected music that has not been previously selected is selected as a previously selected music by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the unselected music is displayed as a temporarily selected music image. The audio output means can be made to output from a different part of the music from the case of selection. As a result, the player can listen to the selected music from different parts when the selected music is selected and when the non-selected music is selected, so that the player can output the selected music and not select it. You can enjoy different ways to output music.

[Appendix A18]
When the tentatively selected music is the already selected music, the performance executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the music start portion of the previously selected music, and the temporarily selected music is not yet selected. The gaming machine according to appendix A17, wherein in the case of a selected song, the voice output means (26) causes the unselected song to be output from a chorus part.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A18, the player can listen to the music starting portion when the tentatively selected music is an already selected music, while the climax is selected when the tentatively selected music is an unselected music. You can listen from the part. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start with respect to the previously selected music regarding the temporarily selected music. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the climax part of the song that has not been previously selected, the player can determine whether or not the current temporarily selected song is his / her favorite song. It becomes easy.

[Appendix A19]
When the selected music is the selected music, the performance executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music from a music start portion, and the selected music is the unselected music. If it is, the game machine according to Supplementary Note A17 or Supplementary Note A18, characterized in that the voice output means (26) outputs the unselected music piece from the chorus part.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A19, the player can listen to the music starting portion when the selected music is an already selected music, and from the chorus portion when the selected music is an unselected music. I can listen. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start portion with respect to the previously selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the climax part of the song that has not been selected before, so it is easy to determine whether the selected song is the one he likes. Become.

[Appendix A20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when performing settings related to effects in the special gaming state,
A display setting unit (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the already-selected music image (831) according to a setting operation on the operation unit (21) by a player;
The production execution means (51)
A display setting screen that allows the display screen in the image display means (341) to set whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (88, 98)
The display setting means (51) is configured such that when the player performs the setting operation by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98), The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A19, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with a setting content set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20, since it is possible to set whether to display the selected music image included in the music selection image, the music selection image is displayed on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. be able to. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by the player. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player displays a music selection image that does not include the previously selected music image when the music selection image includes a previously selected music image for the previously selected music that the previous player has selected in the past. be able to.

[Appendix A21]
Display setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information related to setting history for the display setting,
The effect execution means (51) is configured to display the display setting storage means (512) as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
The display setting means (51), when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), when the player performs a setting operation for setting the display based on the setting history image (881), The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the display setting of the content set by the person is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A21, the player can perform the same display setting as the past setting contents by performing the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen in the image display unit is the display setting history screen. Can do. Therefore, the player can perform a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means, for example, when it is desired to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to appendix A21, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image showing a setting time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A22, the player can distinguish, for example, the setting history of the player who has played before and his own setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A23]
An output for performing an output start setting as to which of the plurality of output start portions determined in advance according to the setting operation performed on the operation means (21) by the player as the temporary selection music or the output start portion of the selection music A start setting means (51);
The production execution means (51) is configured to enable an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start portion setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A22, wherein, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music or the selected music is performed according to the setting content set by the player .

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A23, since the output start portion of the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be set, the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be output from the sound output means from the portion that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A24, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a portion that suits his / her preference. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. Therefore, the player selects the provisional selection music or the selection music from the music start part and the chorus part to start the output of the provisional selection music or the selection music, so that the temporary selection music or the selection music is the music previously selected or selected previously. This makes it easy to determine whether the music has not been played or whether the music has never been heard before.

[Appendix A25]
An output start setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information related to a setting history for the output start setting;
The production execution means (51) serves as the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). (512) shift to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the setting history image (871). In the case, the game machine according to Supplementary Note A23 or Supplementary Note A24, wherein the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A25, when the display screen on the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation on the operation means to output the same content as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means, for example, when it is desired to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A25, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the setting history image (871) including an image indicating a setting time on the output start setting history screen (87).

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A26, the player can distinguish, for example, the setting history of the player who has played before and his own setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Music selection information storage means (512) for storing music selection information related to music selection by the player;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The production execution means (51)
The music selection image (83) is at least a temporarily selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341) in an identifiable manner,
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporary selection music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the voice output means (26) is caused to output the temporary selection music, and the temporary selection is performed when the determination operation is performed. The music output that has been performed is output from the voice output means (26) as the selected music,
The music selection information storage means includes, as the music selection information, temporarily selected music information relating to the temporarily selected music, and already selected music that has already been selected by the player as music to be output by the audio output means (26). And information on selected music related to unselected music related to unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music,
The unselected music information is the initial temporarily selected music image of the initial temporarily selected music corresponding to the initial temporarily selected music image displayed on the image display means (341) as the temporarily selected music image (832). A non-selected music information regarding non-selected music that was not selected by the player at the stage of being displayed on the image display means (341).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, non-selected music information related to non-selected music is stored in the music selection information storage means. Therefore, based on the non-selected music information, it is possible to make the player recognize information related to the non-selected music via rendering means such as an image display means. Thereby, since the player can recognize which is a non-selected music among a plurality of music, despite being displayed on the image display means (341) as the initial provisional selection music image, This frees you from the hassle of temporarily selecting or selecting unselected music that the player did not select.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games to improve the player's gaming motivation.

[Appendix B2]
An information updating means (51) for updating the music selection information stored in the music selection information storage means (512);
The information updating means (51) executes an update for clearing information related to the music corresponding to the selected music from the non-selected music information when the selected music is the non-selected music. A gaming machine according to B1.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B2, since the non-selected music is handled as other music when the non-selected music is selected, the music selected by the player is displayed on the image display means as the non-selected music image. It is avoided that it continues being done. This prevents the player from mistaking the previously selected music piece as a non-selected music piece and unintentionally avoiding the selection of the music piece.

[Appendix B3]
The information updating means (51) performs an update to include information on music corresponding to the selected music in the selected music information when the selected music is the non-selected music. A gaming machine according to B2.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3, in addition to preventing the previously selected music from being mistaken as a non-selected music, the selected music corresponding to the music because the music is handled as the selected music An image is displayed on the image display means. Thereby, it can prevent more reliably that the selection of the said music is avoided unintentionally.

[Appendix B4]
The production execution means (51)
As the music selection image (83), at least the temporarily selected music image (832), an already selected music image (831) indicating the selected music, and an unselected music indicating the unselected music The image (833) is displayed on the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B3, wherein the unselected music image (833) includes an identifiable non-selected music image (834) indicating the non-selected music.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B4, an image including a non-selected music image is displayed as an unselected music image, so that the player does not select it even though it was first displayed as a temporarily selected music image in the past. Since the non-selected music can be distinguished from other music, the player can more reliably avoid the temporary selection of the non-selected music against his / her intention. In addition, since the non-selected music image is displayed, it is possible to search for a new favorite music while avoiding the non-selected music, so even if the music selection is limited to a relatively short time, the time limit is set. It can be used effectively to search for new favorite music.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, since the selected music image and the unselected music are displayed as the music selection image, the player can not only distinguish the selected music from the unselected music but also recognize the selected music. In either case of selecting a music piece or an unselected music piece, the target music piece can be easily and efficiently selected and output from the audio output means with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B5]
The effect execution means (51) has a predetermined upper limit number of previously non-selected music images (831) selected from two or more based on the non-selected music information stored in the music selection information storage means. ) Is displayed on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to appendix B4,

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, an upper limit is provided for the number of non-selected music images, so that an excessive number of non-selected music images are prevented from being displayed, and unselected music is selected unnecessarily. Risk can be further reduced.

[Appendix B6]
The effect execution means (51) displays the non-selected music images (834) corresponding to the upper limit number of the non-selected music in a position distant from the temporarily selected music image (832) in order from the newest non-selected date and time. The gaming machine according to Appendix B5, wherein

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, since the non-selected music image for the new non-selected music of the non-selected date and time is displayed at a position far from the temporarily selected music image, the non-selected music that was not selected most recently is selected. Can reduce the risk.

[Appendix B7]
The production execution means (51)
A predetermined number (for example, “10”) of music selection images (83) set in advance to a number smaller than the number of the plurality of songs (for example, “20”) are displayed on the image display means (341),
In the initial music selection image (83) initially displayed on the image display means (341), the player does not display the non-selected music image (834) on the image display means (341), and the player operates the operation means. The game machine according to any one of appendix B4 to appendix B6, wherein the non-selected music image (834) is displayed on the image display means (341) in response to the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image initially displayed on the image display means. On the other hand, the possibility that the non-selected music is selected by the player is low. Therefore, non-selected music images that are more likely to be selected by the player than non-selected music are more selected in the initial music selection image by not displaying non-selected music images in the initial music selection image. Many can be displayed. Thereby, the time required when selecting a music from unselected music excluding non-selected music can be reduced, and the stress applied to the player in music selection can be reduced. On the other hand, since the player can display the non-selected music image by operating the operation means, the player can also select music from the non-selected music.

[Appendix B8]
Initial music arrangement determining means (51) for determining an initial arrangement of the plurality of music pieces in order to display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341);
The effect execution means (51) displays the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341) according to the initial arrangement determined by the initial music arrangement determination means (51),
In the initial arrangement, the initial music arrangement determining means (51) is configured to select the non-selection at a position where the minimum number of operations for the operation means (21) required to make the non-selected music as the temporarily selected music is the largest. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B4 to appendix B7, wherein music pieces are arranged.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8, the minimum number of operations with respect to the operation means necessary for the non-selected music that is not likely to be selected by the player (the player is more likely to avoid selection) to be the temporarily selected music Are arranged at the position where the number of is the largest. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, in the initial music selection image, more unselected music (excluding non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than non-selected music may be displayed. it can. Thereby, the time required when selecting a music from unselected music excluding non-selected music can be reduced, and the stress applied to the player in music selection can be reduced.

[Appendix B9]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when performing settings related to effects in the special gaming state,
A display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the unselected music image (834) in response to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by a player;
The production execution means (51)
A display setting screen that enables setting whether or not to display the unselected music image (831) on the display screen in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (88, 98)
The display setting means (51) is configured such that when the player performs the setting operation by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98), The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B4 to appendix B8, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with a setting content set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B9, the player can select whether or not to display the non-selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player selects a music selection image that does not include a non-selected music image, for example, when the music selection image includes a non-selected music image for a non-selected music that the previous player has not selected in the past. Can be displayed.

[Appendix B10]
Display setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information related to setting history for the display setting,
The effect execution means (51) is configured to display the display setting storage means (512) as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
The display setting means (51), when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), when a player performs a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881), The gaming machine according to appendix B9, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B10, the player can perform the same display setting as the past setting contents by performing the setting operation on the operation means when the display screen in the image display means is the display setting history screen. Can do. Therefore, the player can perform a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means, for example, when it is desired to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix B11]
The game machine according to appendix B10, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image indicating a setting time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B11, the player can distinguish, for example, the setting history of the player who has played before and his own setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B12]
When the music selection image (83) is first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) initially displays the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first. 832) is selected from the unselected music, and the initial temporary selection music is output from the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B11, .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B12, when displaying a music selection image, an initial temporary selection music to be displayed as a temporary selection music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. The Therefore, even if the player finally selects a song from the previously selected music, the player can listen to the unselected music as the initial provisionally selected music in the process so far, An opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected music can be secured.

[Appendix B13]
The game machine according to appendix B12, wherein the performance executing means (51) selects the initial provisionally selected music from music other than the non-selected music among the unselected music.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B13, when displaying the music selection image, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from non-selected music other than unselected music. Therefore, the player selects the non-selected music that has not been selected by the player in spite of having been previously selected as the provisionally selected music by the effect execution means and is displayed again as the initial temporarily selected music image by the effect execution means. You are freed from the hassle of doing things.

[Appendix C1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The production execution means (51)
The music selection image (83) is at least a temporarily selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporary selection music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the voice output means (26) is caused to output the temporary selection music, and the temporary selection is performed when the determination operation is performed. The music output that has been performed is output from the voice output means (26) as the selected music,
In the case where the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a previously selected music that has already been selected by a player and the case where the music is an unselected music other than the previously selected music, the temporarily selected music or the selected music A game machine characterized by causing the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from different parts.

[Appendix C2]
The production execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start portion when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the already selected music. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized by:

[Appendix C3]
The production executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a chorus part when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1 or Supplementary C2, which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes C1 to C3, the selected music is output from different parts of the music when the previously selected music is temporarily selected or selected and when the unselected music is temporarily selected or selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the temporarily selected music or the selected music from different portions depending on whether the previously selected music is temporarily selected or selected and when the temporarily selected or unselected music is selected. For example, if the temporarily selected music or the selected music is an already selected music, the selected music can be listened to from the beginning of the music, and if the temporarily selected music or the selected music is an unselected music, the unselected music is stopped. You can listen from the part. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the already selected music that has been listened to the chorus part from the music start part. On the other hand, for music that has not been selected before, it is possible to listen to the climax part of the music that is the most exciting, so it is easy to determine whether it is a music of your choice.

[Appendix C4]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) initially displays the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed as the temporary selection music image (832). The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note C1 to Supplementary Note C3, wherein an initial provisionally selected musical piece is selected from the unselected musical pieces among the plurality of musical pieces.

[Appendix C5]
The game machine according to Supplementary Note C4, wherein the effect execution means (51) causes the voice output means (26) to output the initial provisionally selected music piece from a chorus part.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note C4 and Supplementary Note C5, when displaying a music selection image, a temporary selection music to be displayed first as a temporary selection music image is selected from unselected music, and the unselected music is, for example, a chorus part Is output by voice output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, the player can listen to the unselected music piece in the process so far. In particular, when the initial provisionally selected music is output from the chorus part, the chorus part with the highest excitement of the non-selected music can always be heard, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the non-selected music to the player can be secured.

[Appendix C6]
An output for performing an output start setting as to which of the plurality of output start portions determined in advance according to the setting operation performed on the operation means (21) by the player as the temporary selection music or the output start portion of the selection music A start setting means (51);
The production execution means (51) is configured to enable an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start portion setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C5, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting for the temporarily selected music or the selected music is performed according to the setting content set by the player .

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix C6, since it is possible to set the output start part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music, it is possible to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the sound output unit from the part that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C7, the player can start the output of the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a portion that suits his / her preference. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. Therefore, the player selects the provisional selection music or the selection music from the music start part and the chorus part to start the output of the provisional selection music or the selection music, so that the temporary selection music or the selection music is the music previously selected or selected previously. This makes it easy to determine whether the music has not been played or whether the music has never been heard before.

[Appendix C8]
An output start setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information related to an output start setting history for the output start setting;
The production execution means (51) serves as the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). (512) to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) by a player when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). When it is made, the game machine according to Supplementary Note C6 or Supplementary C7, wherein the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C8, the player can perform the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means, for example, when it is desired to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix C9]
The effect execution means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87), and the gaming machine according to appendix C8, .

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix C9, the player can distinguish, for example, the output start setting history of the player who has played before and his own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The production execution means (51)
The music selection image (83) is at least a temporarily selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporary selection music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the voice output means (26) is caused to output the temporary selection music, and the temporary selection is performed when the determination operation is performed. The music output that has been performed is output from the voice output means (26) as the selected music,
A gaming machine characterized in that the provisionally selected music output from the audio output means (26) is continuously output at the timing when the determination operation is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, provisionally selected music is continuously output when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the selected music is output continuously from the temporary selection stage, so that the same part of the music is output in a short time from the temporary selection stage to the music selection stage. Is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or disgusted by listening to the rust portion of the same music repeatedly in a short time or by interrupting the music.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games and improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the selected music piece is the already selected music piece.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D2, when the temporarily selected music is an already selected music, the previously selected music is output continuously from the stage of the temporary selection. As a result, the chorus part of the same song is prevented from being output repeatedly in the short time from the temporary selection stage to the music selection stage. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix D3]
When the tentatively selected music is the already selected music, the performance executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to send a music start part (for example, a singing part (A melody part)) of the selected music. The gaming machine according to appendix D2, characterized in that the game is output from an intro part (prelude part).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the previously selected music is output from the music start portion, and when the selected music is the already selected music, the temporarily selected music continues. Is output. That is, when selecting a previously selected music, it is output from the music start part at the stage of temporary selection, and even when a music is selected, the selected music is output continuously from the stage of temporary selection. Therefore, not only is it prevented that the same chorus part of the same music is output in a short time from the selection stage to the music selection stage, but the music start part of the already selected music is at least temporarily selected. I can listen to it for sure. In addition, since the previously selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage, the player can increase the tension from the music starting portion toward the chorus portion, and can maintain the tension at a high level.

[Appendix D4]
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R probability variable jackpot game state), and a second special game state (16R probability variable jackpot game state) having a longer game time than the first special game state. Including
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming state is the first special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment D4, in the first special gaming state in which the game time is short, the player performs the tentatively selected music that has been output from the audio output means at the timing when the deciding operation is performed. You can continue listening from the part that was output when That is, in the first special game state, the same part of the music is output both during the temporary selection of the music and after the music selection during the short game time, or the music is output again from a different part after the music selection. It has been avoided. Thereby, since the music can be continuously listened to within a short game time, the music can be enjoyed without stress even in a short game time.

[Appendix D5]
The game machine according to appendix D4, wherein the effect execution means (51) causes the sound output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music piece from a chorus part in the first special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix D5, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to let the player listen to the climax part with the highest excitement for the temporarily selected music, so even if the game time is short, An opportunity to convey the goodness of the selected music can be secured. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the climax part of the tentatively selected music, it is easy to determine whether the tentatively selected music is his / her favorite music or a previously selected favorite music. In addition, when the gaming state is the first special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus part, so that the player can listen to the chorus part reliably after the temporary selection and after selecting the music. You can listen to music continuously without stress.

[Appendix D6]
When the determination operation is performed in the second special game state, the performance executing means (51) sends the selected music to the voice output means (26) as a music start part (for example, a singing part (A melody part). ), An intro part (prelude part)), the gaming machine according to appendix D4 or appendix D5

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D6, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music starting portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen to the music that has been output from the audio output means when the determination operation is performed, from the music start portion again. That is, in the second special game state, since the game time is sufficient, it is possible to fully enjoy the music including the chorus part of the music from the music start part.

[Appendix D7]
The production execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music from a music start portion in the second special game state, according to any one of Supplementary Notes D4 to D6 The gaming machine described.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment D7, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music starting portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen to the music that has been output from the audio output means when the determination operation is performed, from the music start portion again. That is, in the second special game state, since the game time is sufficient, it is possible to fully enjoy the music including the chorus part of the music from the music start part. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the first special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music starting portion as described above. Therefore, the player can determine whether the game state is the first special game state or the second special game state depending on whether the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus part or the music start part. is there. In addition, the game time differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, and generally, the longer the game time, the higher the expected game value tends to be. Therefore, the player can enjoy paying attention to the output start portion of the temporarily selected music in order to determine whether or not the second special gaming state is more generally advantageous to the player.

[Appendix D8]
The effect executing means (51) indicates that the music selection image (83) is an already selected music that has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D7, wherein the music image (831) is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment D8, the player operates the operation unit while confirming the position of the selected music image in the music selection image, thereby temporarily selecting the selected music and displaying it as the temporarily selected music image. Can be made. Further, the selected music can be output from the audio output means by performing the determination operation on the operation means in a state where the previously selected music selected previously is displayed as the temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music previously selected with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the selected music from the sound output means.

[Appendix D9]
The production execution means (51)
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that it is an unselected music other than the selected music of the plurality of music is further identified in the image display means (341). Display
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the initial temporary selection music for the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first as the temporary selection music image (832) is the plurality. The gaming machine according to attachment D8, wherein the game machine is selected from the unselected music pieces of the music piece.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D9, when displaying a music selection image, a temporary selection music to be displayed as a temporary selection music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. . Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected music, the player can listen to the unselected music in the process so far, and the player can enjoy the unselected music. It is possible to secure an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix D10]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when performing settings related to effects in the special gaming state,
Output start setting means for performing output start setting of whether to start output of the tentatively selected music or the selected music from either the music start part or the chorus part according to the setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player. 51),
The production execution means (51) is configured to enable an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start portion setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D9, wherein when an operation is performed, the output start setting is performed according to a setting content set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, the player can set the output start of the temporarily selected music or the selected music. Therefore, the player can output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from his / her favorite part by setting the output start part.

[Appendix D11]
An output start setting storage unit (512) capable of storing output start setting history information related to the output start setting history for the output start setting;
The production execution means (51) serves as the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). (512) to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871B) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) is an operation for performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871B) by a player when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). When the game is performed, the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed, and the gaming machine according to appendix D10,

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D11, when the display screen on the image display means is an output start setting history screen, the player can perform an output operation with the same content as the past output start setting by performing a setting operation on the operation means. Can be set to start. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous output start setting, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D12]
The effect execution means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871B) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87), and the gaming machine according to appendix D11, .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D12, the player can distinguish, for example, the output start setting history of the player who has played before and his own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The production execution means (51)
The music selection image (83) is at least a temporarily selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporary selection music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the voice output means (26) is caused to output the temporary selection music, and the temporary selection is performed when the determination operation is performed. The music output that has been performed is output from the voice output means (26) as the selected music,
When displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). If it is an unselected song other than the selected song, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected song from the chorus part,
When the selected music is the unselected music, the voice output means (26) causes the unselected music to be output from the music start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus part, and the selected music is output from the music start part. Therefore, when an unselected song that has not been selected before is selected, the player can listen to the music start portion and the chorus portion of the unselected song, so that the player can fully enjoy the goodness of the unselected song. Can tell. On the other hand, the player does not listen to the rust portion that has already been output in the provisional selection stage in a short time and listens to the unselected music that is the selected music even if the time required for the special game is short. It can be listened to from the beginning of the music after selecting the music, and it can be reconfirmed whether the unselected music meets its own preference.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games to improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix E2]
The effect execution means (51) displays a predetermined number (eg, “10”) of music selection images (83) that are predetermined to a number smaller than the number of the plurality of music pieces (eg, “20”). (341) The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E2, there are prepared so many songs that the image display means cannot display them all at once, and music selection images for some of the songs are displayed. Even if it exists, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix E3]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the tentatively selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) indicating the tentatively selected music so as to be distinguishable. The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, characterized by:

[Appendix E4]
The game machine according to appendix E3, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the already selected music image (831) in a display mode different from the temporarily selected music image (832).

[Appendix E5]
The effect execution means (51) displays an additional image indicating the selected music piece at least at a part of the periphery of the selected music picture image (831). Game machines.

[Appendix E6]
The effect execution means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a predetermined area in the image display means (341), according to any one of Supplementary Note E3 to Supplementary Note E5 Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix E3 to appendix E6, the already selected music image is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the temporarily selected music image, so that it is easier to find the already selected music image from the music selection image. Therefore, the convenience in provisional selection and selection of already selected music is further improved.

[Appendix E7]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of the selected musical piece images (831) selected from two or more numbers. To Attached E6.

[Appendix E8]
Storage means (512) for storing selected music information on the selected music;
The effect execution means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music image (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). A gaming machine as set forth in appendix E7, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E7 and Supplementary Note E8, in the special game state, the music selection image including the already selected musical piece images of the upper limit number selected from 2 or more is displayed on the image display means. That is, a plurality of already selected music images can be displayed. In addition, since an upper limit is provided for the number of already selected music images, an excessive number of already selected music images are prevented from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select a previously selected song based on a moderate number of already selected song images, and the operation burden when selecting a selected song is reduced.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine according to appendix E8, wherein the storage means (512) sets only the last selected song as an already selected song when a plurality of song selections are performed in the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E9, when music selection is performed a plurality of times in the special game state, only the last selected music is set as the selected music. Therefore, even if the music selection is performed a plurality of times during execution of one special game state, the final selection music is clarified and the selected music image is occupied by the selected music for one special game state. Can be prevented. Also, for example, if you don't like the selected song and you reselect another song, you can avoid displaying the song you didn't like as a previously selected song image, and select the selected song again Convenience when selecting based on the music image is improved.

[Appendix E10]
In the initial music selection image (83) that is initially displayed on the image display means (341), the performance execution means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the previously selected music images (831) in the order from the newest selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E7 to appendix E9, wherein the game machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E10, in the music selection image displayed first, the already selected music image for the newly selected music with the new selection date and time is displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can easily find the previously selected music that has been selected most recently when the music selection image is displayed, and can select the music that has been selected most recently by the number of operations on the operation means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the most recently selected music again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E11]
In the initial music selection image (83) initially displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E7 to appendix E9, wherein the game machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E11, the selected music image for the selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number) is displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image. That is, the selected music image is displayed as a reflection of the recent music selection tendency by the player. Therefore, the player can easily find the previously selected music that has been selected recently when the music selection image is displayed, and can select the recently selected music again with a small number of operations on the operating means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation load when selecting the recently selected music again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E12]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display all of the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) for different music on the image display means (341). A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment E12, since the selected music image does not include a plurality of the selected music images, even if the upper limit number is provided for the number of displayed selected music images, the music corresponding to the upper limit number is provided. Selected music images for a number of selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player has repeatedly selected the same music and wants to select a previously selected music other than the music, the player can easily find the selected music to be selected. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the previously selected music again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E13]
When the display number of the previously selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the display number is insufficient with respect to the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). ), The unselected music image (833) is displayed as a music selection image (83) indicating the unselected music, according to any one of appendix E7 to appendix E12, .

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E13, even if the display number of the selected music image to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, the unselected music image is displayed instead of the selected music image. Thus, a prescribed number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix E14]
The production execution means (51)
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating the unselected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E13.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E14, the player can distinguish and recognize an already selected music image that has been selected before and an unselected music image that has not been selected before. By operating the operating means while confirming, it is possible to temporarily select an unselected song and display it as a temporarily selected song image. Therefore, even when the player selects an unselected song instead of an already selected song, the player can select an unselected song with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the unselected song from the audio output means.

[Appendix E15]
When the music execution image (83) is displayed on the image display module (341), the performance execution unit (51) displays the temporarily selected music image (832) and the previously selected music image (831). The gaming machine according to attachment E14, wherein the gaming machine is displayed between the selected music image (833).

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E15, at least when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the already selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can change either the previously selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been selected before by changing the temporarily selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means. Even when a song is selected, the target song can be temporarily selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix E16]
The effect execution means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the initial temporary selection music for the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note E1 to Supplementary Note E15, which is selected from the unselected musical pieces of the musical piece.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E16, the initial temporary selected music is selected from the unselected music, and the initial temporary selected music that is the unselected music is output from the sound output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected music, the player can listen to the unselected music in the process so far, and the player can enjoy the unselected music. It is possible to secure an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix E17]
The tentatively selected tune or the selected tune from different parts of the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune depending on whether the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune is the already selected tune. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E16, wherein output means (26) outputs the output means.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E17, an unselected music that has not been selected before is selected as a previously selected music by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the unselected music is displayed as a temporarily selected music image. The audio output means can be made to output from a different part of the music from the case of selection. As a result, the player can listen to the selected music from different parts when the selected music is selected and when the non-selected music is selected, so that the player can output the selected music and not select it. You can enjoy different ways to output music.

[Appendix E18]
The production execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the music start portion of the already selected music when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music. The gaming machine described.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E18, the player can listen to the music starting portion when the temporarily selected music is an already selected music, while the chorus is selected when the temporarily selected music is an unselected music. You can listen from the part. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start with respect to the previously selected music regarding the temporarily selected music. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the climax part of the song that has not been previously selected, the player can determine whether or not the current temporarily selected song is his / her favorite song. It becomes easy.

[Appendix E19]
The production execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music from the music start portion when the selected music is the selected music, and the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to appendix E17 or appendix E18, wherein in some cases the unselected music is output from the chorus part to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment E19, the player can listen to the music starting portion when the selected music is an already selected music, and from the chorus portion when the selected music is an unselected music. I can listen. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start portion with respect to the previously selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the climax part of the song that has not been selected before, so it is easy to determine whether the selected song is the one he likes. Become.

[Appendix E20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when performing settings related to effects in the special gaming state,
A display setting unit (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the already-selected music image (831) according to a setting operation on the operation unit (21) by a player;
The production execution means (51)
A display setting screen that allows the display screen in the image display means (341) to set whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (88, 98)
The display setting means (51) is configured such that when the player performs the setting operation by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen shifts to the display setting screen (88, 98). The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note E3 to Supplementary Note E13, wherein the display setting is performed according to a setting content set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E20, since it is possible to set whether to display a specific image included in the music selection image, it is possible to display the music selection image on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. it can. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by the player. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player displays a music selection image that does not include the previously selected music image when the music selection image includes a previously selected music image for the previously selected music that the previous player has selected in the past. be able to.

[Appendix E21]
Display setting storage means (512) capable of storing display setting history information related to the display setting history for the display setting,
The effect execution means (51) is configured to display the display setting storage means (512) as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the display setting history information stored in
The display setting means (51) is configured such that when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), a player performs a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the display setting history image (881). The gaming machine according to appendix E20, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment E21, the player can perform the same display setting as the past setting contents by performing the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen in the image display unit is the display setting history screen. Can do. Therefore, the player can perform a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means, for example, when it is desired to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix E22]
The game machine according to appendix E21, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the display setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E22, the player can distinguish, for example, the display setting history of the player who has played before and his own display setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a display setting history to be selected in its own display setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired display setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E23]
An output for performing an output start setting as to which of the plurality of output start portions determined in advance according to the setting operation performed on the operation means (21) by the player as the temporary selection music or the output start portion of the selection music A start setting means (51);
The production execution means (51) is configured to enable an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start portion setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The game according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E22, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music or the selected music is performed according to the setting content set by the player Machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E23, since the output start part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be set, the temporarily output music or the selected music can be output from the sound output means from the part according to the preference of the player. it can.

[Appendix E24]
The gaming machine according to appendix E23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E24, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a portion that suits his / her preference. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. Therefore, the player selects the provisional selection music or the selection music from the music start part and the chorus part to start the output of the provisional selection music or the selection music, so that the temporary selection music or the selection music is the music previously selected or selected previously. This makes it easy to determine whether the music has not been played or whether the music has never been heard before.

[Appendix E25]
An output start setting storage unit (512) capable of storing output start setting history information related to the output start setting history for the output start setting;
The production execution means (51) serves as the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). (512) to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) by a player when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). If so, the game machine according to appendix E23 or appendix E24, wherein the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E25, when the display screen on the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation on the operation means to output the same content as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means, for example, when it is desired to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix E26]
The effect execution means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87), and the gaming machine according to appendix E25, .

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment E26, the player can distinguish, for example, the output start setting history of the player who has played before and his own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix F1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The production execution means (51)
The music selection image (83) is at least a temporarily selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporary selection music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the voice output means (26) is caused to output the temporary selection music, and the temporary selection is performed when the determination operation is performed. The audio output means (26) outputs the selected music as the selected music,
Causing the audio output means (26) to start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a first part of a plurality of predetermined output start parts,
When the predetermined game condition is satisfied on the condition that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effecting means, the audio output means (26) is provided with the plural A game machine characterized in that the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is started from a second part different from the first part of the output starting part.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first part, but in the gaming situation where the actual gaming situation is more advantageous to the player than the gaming situation suggested by the directing means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second part different from the first part. That is, the player can play a game in which the current game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the directing means by outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the second part different from the first part. Know the situation. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting the music is not simply an act of temporarily selecting or selecting the music, but the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the directing means. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm whether or not there is. This gives the player the motivation to positively select or select the music piece positively, allowing the player to actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games and improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming state includes a first gaming state, a second gaming state in which the main control means (41) has a probability that it is determined that the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state, and is higher than the first gaming state. Including the special gaming state,
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state in which the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state after the special gaming state is ended, and the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state after the special gaming state is completed. Including the second special gaming state to be transferred,
The performance executing means (51) is configured to provide the provisionally selected music piece on the condition that the gaming state suggested by the rendering means is a first special gaming state and an actual gaming state is the second special gaming state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the selected music piece is output from the second part to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special gaming state, the selected music is output from the second portion. That is, when the player selects a song, the selected song is output from the second portion, so that the current special game state is a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. I can get to know that. Therefore, enjoy the determination operation for selecting a song as an act of confirming whether it is a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state, rather than an act of selecting a song. Can do. Thereby, the motivation to actively select music is given to the player, and the player can actively participate in the special game.

[Appendix F3]
The production execution means (51) is a selection that has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26) from among the plurality of music, as the temporarily selected music or the selected music. The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or appendix F2, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected song or the selected song from the second part on condition that the song is an unselected song other than a song .

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, the selected music is output from the second portion on the condition that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is an unselected music in the second special gaming state. That is, when the player temporarily selects or selects an unselected song, the temporarily selected song or the selected song is output from the second part, so that the actual game situation is more than the game situation suggested by the directing means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting the music can be enjoyed not as an act of temporarily selecting or selecting the music but as an act of confirming whether the game situation is advantageous to the player. Accordingly, the player can be motivated to positively select or select an unselected song and listen to the unselected song, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected song to the player can be secured.

[Appendix F4]
When the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music, the first part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a chorus part, and the temporarily selected music or the second part of the selected music is The gaming machine according to attachment F3, wherein the gaming machine is a music start portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment F4, the first part is the rust part, while the second part is a music start part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second When output from the portion, it is possible to give a clear uncomfortable feeling to the player. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effecting means. As a result, the player can enjoy provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F5]
When the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music, the first part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a music start part, and the temporary selected music or the second part of the selected music Is a rust portion, the gaming machine according to appendix F3.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F5, the first part is the music start part, while the second part is a rust part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second When output from the portion, it is possible to give a clear uncomfortable feeling to the player. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effecting means. As a result, the player can enjoy provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F6]
The production execution means (51) is provided on the condition that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a selected music that has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2, which causes the audio output means (26) to output the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, even if the already selected music is provisionally selected or selected, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second portion. That is, when the player temporarily selects or selects the previously selected music, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second part, so that the actual game situation is more than the game situation suggested by the directing means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous to the player. Therefore, an operation for temporarily selecting or selecting an unselected song can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a song but as an act of confirming whether the game situation is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F7]
When the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the first part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a music start part, and the second part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a chorus part. The gaming machine according to appendix F6, which is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F7, the first part is a music start part, while the second part is a rust part that is clearly different from the first part. When output from the portion, it is possible to give a clear uncomfortable feeling to the player. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effecting means. As a result, the player can enjoy provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F8]
When the selected music is the already selected music, the first portion of the selected music is a continuation of the temporarily selected music output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to Appendix F6, wherein the second part of the selected music piece is a chorus part or a music start part.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F8, the first part is a continuation part of the selected music piece, while the second part is a rust part or a music start part that is clearly different from the first part. When output from the second part, it is possible to give a clear uncomfortable feeling to the player. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effecting means. As a result, the player can enjoy provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F9]
The effect execution means (51) initially displays the temporary selection music image (832) as the temporary selection music image (832) when the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341). Any one of Supplementary Notes F1 to F8, characterized in that the temporary output music is output from the second part to the audio output means (26) on condition that the music image (832) is an initial temporary selected music. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9, even if the player does not perform any operation on the operation means, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the second portion when the music selection image is displayed on the image display means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to notify a player who does not select or select a song temporarily that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the directing means.

[Appendix F10]
The special game state includes a third special game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R probability variable jackpot game state), and a fourth special game state (16R probability variable jackpot game state) having a longer game time than the third special game state. Including
The production execution means (51)
In the third special gaming state, the temporary output music or the selected music is output from the first part to the audio output means (26),
In the fourth special game state, the provisionally selected music piece is provided on the condition that a suggestion effect suggesting that the third special game state is being executed as an effect to be executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.). Alternatively, the gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the selected music piece is output from the second part to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is the second part on the condition that the suggestion effect that suggests the third special game state is executed in the fourth special game state. Is output from. That is, the player outputs the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second part, so that the current special game state is the fourth special game state having a longer game time than the third special game state. It is possible to know that the expected value of the game value that can be acquired is high. Therefore, the player enjoys the act of temporarily selecting or selecting a song as an act of confirming whether or not it is the fourth special game state in which the expected value of the game value is higher than that of the third special game state. it can.

[Appendix F11]
When the gaming state is the fourth special gaming state, the tentatively selected music or the first part of the selected tune is a music start part, and the tentatively selected music or the second part of the selected music is a chorus part. The gaming machine according to appendix F10, characterized in that.

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to appendix F10 or appendix F11, wherein when the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first portion of the temporarily selected music piece is a rust portion.

[Appendix F13]
When the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first portion of the selected music piece is a continuation of the portion output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to appendix F10 or appendix F11, characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F11 to Supplementary Note 13, in the fourth special game state, the first part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the music start part, while the second part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is By being a chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, it is possible to give a clear discomfort to the player when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second part. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effecting means. As a result, the player can enjoy provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F14]
The production execution means (51) determines whether or not to output the selected music piece from the second part by a lottery performed in response to the determination operation on the operation means by the player. To the appendix F13.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F14, a game situation (for example, a probable change jackpot game state) in which the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means (eg, a normal jackpot (non-probability big hit game state)). ), It is possible to generate a contradiction in the output start portion of the selected music piece by a simple control called lottery by the determination operation for selecting the music piece.

[Appendix F15]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14, wherein the number of lotteries is provided with a predetermined upper limit for one execution of the special game.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, it is possible to suppress the unnecessary selection of the music piece repeatedly by the player in one special game.

[Appendix F16]
The production execution means (51)
Enabling selection of music to be output by the audio output means (26) within a predetermined selection valid period in the special gaming state;
The promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means is scheduled to be executed after the selection valid period. The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F15, characterized in that the sound output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second portion as a condition.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F16, when provisional selection or selection of music is performed within the selection effective period, the provisional selection music or the selection music is output from the second portion, which is suggested by the production means. It can be known in advance that a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix G1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The performance executing means (51) suggests or clearly indicates the game state on condition that a player performs a determination operation on the operation means (21) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by causing an effect (26, 341, etc.) to execute an effect (suggest effect 1 to suggest effect 8 and finalized effects 1 to 4).

According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1, the music selection operation effect that suggests or clearly indicates the game state is executed by the determination operation on the operation means by the player for selecting the music. Therefore, the player can enjoy the determination operation for selecting the music as an action for confirming the game state based on the music selection operation effect rather than the action of simply selecting the music. This gives the player motivation to actively select music and allows the player to actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games and improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix G2]
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) and a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state (5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, 16R probability jackpot gaming state). )
The music selection operation effect is an expectation suggestion effect (suggest effect 1 to 8) that suggests an expectation level that the gaming state is the second gaming state, or the gaming state is the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, wherein the gaming machine is a confirmed effect (definite effects 1 to 4) that clearly indicates the fact.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation degree that the gaming state is the second special gaming state, or a definite effect that clearly indicates that the gaming state is the second special gaming state. By performing the setting to be executed, the expectation suggesting effect or the confirmed effect is executed by the determination operation on the operation means by the player for selecting the music. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting a song is not an act of simply selecting a song, but an act of confirming the expectation degree of being in the second special gaming state based on the expectation suggestion effect or the confirmed effect. Can be enjoyed as.
On the other hand, by performing the setting not to execute the expectation suggestion effect or the confirmed effect, the expectation suggestion effect or the confirmed effect is not executed even if the determination operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special game while expecting that the game state is the second special game state without having to worry about the contents of the music selection operation effect.

[Appendix G3]
The production execution means (51) is provided on the condition that the selected music is an unselected music other than an already selected music that has already been selected by a player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1 or the supplementary note G2, which causes the presentation means (26, 341, etc.) to execute a music selection operation effect (suggesting effect 1 to suggesting effect 8 and finalizing effects 1 to 4).

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, since the music selection operation effect is executed on the condition that an unselected music piece is selected, the player who wishes to execute the music selection operation effect is not actively activated. The selected music can be selected. This makes it possible for the player to listen to a wide variety of music prepared in advance for output in the special gaming state.

[Appendix G4]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to provide the effect means (26) on condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation is performed on the operation means (21) when selecting a song from the music selection image. , 341, etc.), the game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G3.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the expectation that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by the player performing a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation on the operation means when selecting a song. A music selection operation effect such as an expectation suggesting effect is performed. Therefore, the act of selecting the music is not limited to the music selection, and the expectation of being in the second special game state based on the music selection operation effect such as the expectation suggestion effect by performing the continuous hit operation or the long press operation. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm. Thereby, a player can be made to perform selection of music actively.

[Appendix G5]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The production execution means (51)
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) to be operated by a player in order to select a music from the music selection image (83), the music selection image (83) together with the image display means (341),
The music selection operation effect is executed on the effect means on condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84). A gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G3, wherein

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, it is expected that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by performing the determination operation on the operating means different from the operating means instructed to select the music A music selection operation effect such as an expectation suggestion effect indicating the degree is executed. Therefore, the act of selecting music is not limited to music selection, and is in the second special game state based on a music selection operation effect such as an expectation suggestion effect by performing an operation on an operation means different from the instructed operation means. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm the degree of expectation. Thereby, a player can be made to perform selection of music actively.

[Appendix G6]
The performance executing means (51) is configured to perform the music selection operation effects (suggested effects 1 to 1) when the determination operation is performed on the operating means (21) during a predetermined selection valid period in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G5, wherein the suggestive effect 8 and the confirmed effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G6, a music selection operation effect such as an expectation suggestion effect is performed by performing a determination operation for the selection of a music during a predetermined period. Therefore, the music selection is performed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. It is possible to suppress the unnecessary selection of music for confirming whether or not the operation effect is executed.

[Appendix G7]
When the number of times that the determination operation has been performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the performance execution means (51) is configured to perform the music selection operation effects (suggest effect 1 to suggest effect 8). The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G6, wherein the effect means (26, 341, etc.) are caused to execute the confirmed effects 1-4.

  According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G7, since the music selection operation effect is performed when the number of times that the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number, without sufficiently listening to the selected music, It is possible to suppress the unnecessary selection of music for confirming whether or not the selection operation effect is executed.

[Appendix G8]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when performing settings related to effects in the special gaming state,
An effect execution setting means (51) for performing an effect execution setting as to whether the effect selecting means (341 or the like) is to execute the music selection operation effect is further provided,
The effect execution means (51) is an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). , 99),
The effect execution setting means (51) is an operation for performing the effect execution setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G7, wherein the production execution setting for the music selection operation production is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G8, since it is possible to set whether or not the music selection operation effect is executed, the music selection operation effect can be executed according to the player's preference. Thereby, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a form suitable for him / herself.

[Appendix G9]
Production execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information related to production execution setting history with respect to the production execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) serves as the effect execution setting storage means as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) shift to the effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying the setting history image (891) corresponding to the effect execution setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51) is a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting by the player based on the effect execution setting history image (891) when the display screen is the effect execution setting history screen (89). The gaming machine according to appendix G8, wherein when the game is performed, the performance execution setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G9, when the display screen in the image display means is the effect execution setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation on the operation means, thereby providing the same effect as the past effect execution setting. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform desired performance execution setting based on the performance execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix G10]
The effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89), and the gaming machine according to appendix G9, .

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G10, the player can distinguish, for example, the player's production execution setting history and his own production execution setting history by referring to the set time, for example. In addition, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in its own effect execution setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
A game execution means (37) for executing a game according to the determination result in the main control means (41);
A holding means (41) for holding the right to execute a game by the game executing means (37) up to a predetermined upper limit;
A holding storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the holding game held by the holding means (41);
An image display means (341) for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for producing an effect for outputting music;
Based on the music selection image (83), a music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means (26) is displayed on the image display means (341). Production execution means (51) for causing the audio output means (26) to output the music selected by the player;
Operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music from the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect execution means (51) includes one that shifts the game state to the special game state after execution of the hold game in the determination result for the hold game stored in the hold storage means (412). If the determination is made for the hold game stored in the hold storage means (412) on the condition that the determination operation for the operation means (21) by the player is performed, after the hold game is executed The effect means (26, 341, etc.) is caused to execute a special effect (a definite effect 2 and a definite effect 4) that suggests or clearly indicates that the game state is to be transferred to the special game state. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, a so-called “holding villa” is performed in which the game state is shifted to the special game state after the hold game is executed by the determination operation on the operation means by the player for selecting a song. The special effects shown can be performed. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting the music can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting the music, but as an act of confirming whether the reserved resort is executed based on the special effect. Thereby, a player can be made to perform selection of music actively.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games and improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix H2]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to provide the effect means (26) on condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation is performed on the operation means (21) when selecting a song from the music selection image. , 341, etc.) to execute the special effects (determined effects 2 and confirmed effects 4).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2, when the player selects a piece of music, the player performs a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation on the operation means, so that the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state after the holding game is executed. A special effect indicating that a so-called “holding villa” is performed may be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting the music is not limited to the music selection, and can be enjoyed as an action for confirming whether the reserved resort is executed based on the special effect. Thereby, a player can be made to perform selection of music actively.

[Appendix H3]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The production execution means (51)
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) to be operated by a player in order to select a music from the music selection image (83), the music selection image (83) together with the image display means (341),
The music selection operation effect is executed on the effect means on condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1 or Supplementary Note H2, wherein

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H3, when a determination operation is performed on an operation means different from the operation means instructed to select a music piece, the game state is set to the special game state after the reserved game is executed. A special effect may be executed indicating that a so-called reserved villa to be shifted to the gaming state is performed. Therefore, the act of selecting the music is not limited to the music selection, and can be enjoyed as an action for confirming whether the reserved resort is executed based on the special effect. Thereby, a player can be made to perform selection of music actively. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest of special games and improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix H4]
The effect execution means (51) causes the effect means (26, 341, etc.) to execute the special effects (definite effect 2 and definite effect 4) on condition that the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H3, which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H4, since the special effect is executed on the condition that the unselected music is selected, the unselected music is positively given to the player who desires to execute the special effect. Can be selected. This makes it possible for the player to listen to a wide variety of music prepared in advance for output in the special gaming state.

[Appendix H5]
The effect execution means (51) performs the special effect on the effect means (on the condition that the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined period in the special gaming state. 26, 341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H4.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, since the special effect is executed on the condition that the determination operation for the selection of the music is performed in a predetermined period, the special effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the selection of music from being repeated unnecessarily for confirmation of whether or not.

[Appendix H6]
The effect execution means (51) performs the special effect on the effect means (26) on the condition that the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number. , 341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H5.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, since the special effect is executed on the condition that the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, the selected music is not sufficiently listened to. In addition, it is possible to suppress the unnecessary selection of music for confirming whether or not the special effect is executed.

[Appendix H7]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when performing settings related to effects in the special gaming state,
It further includes an effect execution setting means (51) for performing an effect execution setting as to whether the effect means (341 or the like) is to execute the special effect.
The effect execution means (51) is an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). , 99),
The effect execution setting means (51) is an operation for performing the effect execution setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H6, wherein when the game is performed, the production execution setting for the special production is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, since it is possible to set whether or not to execute the special effect, it is possible to execute the special effect according to the player's preference. Thereby, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a form suitable for him / herself.

[Appendix H8]
Production execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information related to the setting history for the production execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) serves as the effect execution setting storage means as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) to the effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying the setting history image (891) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting by the player based on the setting history image (891) when the display screen shifts to the effect execution setting history screen (89). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, wherein when it is made, the performance execution setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8, when the display screen on the image display means is the effect execution setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation on the operation means, thereby providing the same effect as the past effect execution setting. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform desired performance execution setting based on the performance execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H9]
The effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image showing a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89), and the gaming machine according to appendix H8, .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9, the player can distinguish, for example, the player's production execution setting history and his own production execution setting history by referring to the set time, for example. In addition, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in its own effect execution setting history, it is easy to give a chance to select a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

10: gaming machine 20: operation button 20a: operation switch 21: selection determination unit 21A: selection button 211: upper selection button 212: lower selection button 213: left selection button 214: right selection buttons 211a to 211d: selection operation switch 21B: Determination button 21Ba: Determination operation switch 26: Speaker 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display unit 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
83: Music selection image 831: Already selected music image 832: Temporarily selected music image 833: Unselected music image 834: Non-selected music image

Claims (7)

Main control means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means for producing an effect by an image, and an effect means including an audio output means for producing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image for causing the player to select music to be output from the plurality of music by the audio output means is displayed on the image display means, and the music selected by the player based on the music selection image is output as the audio Production execution means for outputting to the means;
Operation means operated by a player when selecting music to be output by the audio output means based on the music selection image displayed by the image display means;
With
The production execution means
As the music selection image, a temporary selection music image indicating that the music selection image can be selected by a decision operation on the operation means by a player for selecting a music to be output by at least the audio output means. Displayed on the
In response to an operation on the operation means by a player, the temporary selection music image in the music selection image is changed,
When the temporarily selected music image is displayed on the image display means, the audio output means outputs the temporarily selected music, and the music temporarily selected when the determination operation is performed is selected as the selected music. Output from the audio output means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the provisionally selected music output from the audio output means is continuously output at the timing when the determination operation is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the selected music piece is the already selected music piece.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein when the provisionally selected music is the already selected music, the performance executing means causes the audio output means to output from the music start portion of the already selected music. The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state in which a game time is longer than the first special game state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming state is the first special gaming state.   The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein in the first special game state, the performance executing unit causes the audio output unit to output the provisionally selected music from a chorus part.   The said effect execution means makes the said audio | voice output means output the said selection music from a music start part, when the said determination operation is performed in the said 2nd special game state. The gaming machine described in   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 4 to 6, wherein the effect execution means causes the audio output means to output the temporarily selected music from a music start portion in the second special gaming state. .